Omron SX inverter manual

Cat. No. I127-EN-00B 

SX-V 

High power Variable Frequency Inverters 

Model: SX-V 

400 V Class Three-Phase Input 90 kW to 800 kW 

690 V Class Three-Phase Input 90 kW to 1000 kW 

USER’S MANUAL

OMRON SX-V 

INSTRUCTION MANUAL - ENGLISH 

Software version 4.21 

Document number: I127-EN-00B 

Document name : Omron SX inverter manual 

Edition : Preliminary V0.97 

Date of release: 03-11-2009 

© Copyright Omron Electronics 2009 

Omron retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the 

text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not 

be copied without the explicit permission of Omron Electronics. 

1

Safety Instructions 

Precautions severity 

Follow this advice for good practice. Not following can lead to 

malfunctioning or possibility of injury to the user. 

High risk of malfunction or damage to the inverter or installation, 

possibility of injury to the user. 

Earth and grounding. Potential risk of electric shock or damage to 

inverter or installation. 

High inmediate risk of serious injury to the user, inverter or 

installation. 

Risk if manipulated by unqualified personnel 

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 

Instruction manual 

Read throuhfully this instruction manual before using the Variable Speed Drive, VSD 

Mains voltage selection 

The variable speed drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage range listed below. 

SX-V-4: 230-480 V 

SX-V-6: 500-690 V 

IT Mains supply 

The variable speed drives can be modified for an IT mains supply, (non-earthed neutral), 

check manual and contract your supplier in case of doubt. 

EMC Regulations 

In order to comply with the EMC Directive, it is absolutely necessary to follow the installation 

instructions. All installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC Directive. 

Transport 

To avoid damage, keep the variable speed drive in its original packaging during transport. 

This packaging is specially designed to absorb shocks during transport. 

Handling the inverter 

Installation, commissioning, dismounting, taking measurements, etc, of or on the variable 

speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task. The 

installation must be carried out in accordance with local standards. 

Omron SX inverter manual 1

Condensation 

If the variable speed drive is moved from a cold (storage) room to a room where it will be 

installed, condensation can occur. This can result in sensitive components becoming damp. 

Do not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has evaporated. 

Grounding the inverter 

Be sure to ground the unit. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric 

shock or fire. 

Power factor capacitors for improving cos 

Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet. 

Incorrect connection 

The variable speed drive is not protected against incorrect connection of the mains voltage, 

and in particular against connection of the mains voltage to the motor outlets U, V and W. 

The variable speed drive can be damaged in this way. 

Stop motion mechanical device to ensure safety 

The inverter controls the motor electrically, but has no means to stop it mechanically under 

some types of failures... In applications where mechanical stop is required to a degree of 

safety, a safety assurance study should be carried out to determine the need of additional 

mechanical braking devices. 

Braking resistor and regenerative braking units 

In case the application needs it, be sure to use a specified type of braking resistor/regenerative 

braking unit. In case of a braking resistor, install a thermal relay that monitors the temperature 

of the resistor. Not doing so might result in a burn due to the heat generated in the 

braking resistor/regenerative braking unit. Configure a sequence that enables the Inverter 

power to turn off when unusual overheating is detected in the braking resistor/regenerative 

braking unit. 

Electric protection of installation 

Take safety precautions such as setting up a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuses 

that matches the Inverter capacity on the power supply side. Not doing so might result in 

damage to property due to the short circuit of the load. 

Wiring works and servicing the inverter 

Wiring work must be carried out only by qualified personnel. Not doing so may result in a 

serious injury due to an electric shock. Do not dismantle, repair or modify this product if 

you’re not authorised and qualified for it. Doing so may result in an injury. 

DC-link residual voltage 

After switching off the mains supply, dangerous voltage can still be present in the VSD. 

When opening the VSD for installing and/or commissioning activities wait at least 10 minutes. 

In case of malfunction a qualified technician should check the DC-link or wait for one 

hour before dismantling the VSD for repair. 

Opening the variable speed drive cover 

Only qualified technician can open the inverter. Always take adequate precautions before 

opening the inverter. Although the connections for the control signals and the switches are 

isolated from the main voltage, do not touch the control board when the variable speed drive 

is switched on. 

Do not manipulate inverter under power 

Do not change wiring , put on or take off optional devices or replace cooling fans while the 

input power is being supplied. Doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric 

shock. Inspection of the Inverter must be conducted after the power supply has been 

turned off. Not doing so may result in a serious injury due to an electric shock. The main 

power supply is not necessarily shut off even if the emergency shutoff function is activated. 

2 Omron SX inverter manual

Precautions to be taken with a connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine, the mains voltage 

must always be disconnected from the variable speed drive first. Wait at least 5 minutes 

before starting work. 

Short-circuits 

The Inverter has high voltage parts inside which, if short-circuited, might cause damage to 

itself or other property. Place covers on the openings or take other precautions to make sure 

that no metal objects such as cutting bits or lead wire scraps go inside when installing and 

wiring. 

Earth leakage current 

This variable speed drive has an earth leakage current which does exceed 3.5 mA AC. 

Therefore the minimum size of the protective earth conductor must comply with the local 

safety regulations for high leakage current equipment which means that according the 

standard IEC61800-5-1 the protective earth connection must be assured by one of following 

conditions: 

1. Use a protective conductor with a cable cross-section of at least 10 mm 2 for copper (Cu) 

or 16 mm 2 for aluminium (Al). 

2. Use an additional PE wire, with the same cable cross-section as the used original PE and 

mains supply wiring. 

Residual current device (RCD) compatibility 

This product cause a DC current in the protective conductor. Where a residual current 

device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only a Type B RCD is 

allowed on the supply side of this product. Use RCD of 300 mA minimum. 

Voltage tests (Megger) 

Do not carry out voltage tests (Megger) on the motor, before all the motor cables have been 

disconnected from the variable speed drive. 

Precautions during Autoreset 

When the automatic reset is active, the motor may restart automatically provided that the 

cause of the trip has been removed. If necessary take the appropriate precautions. 

Heat warning 

Be aware of specific parts on the VSD having high temperature. Do not touch the Inverter fins, 

braking resistors and the motor, which may become too hot during the power supply and for some 

time after the power shut-off. Doing so may result in a burn. 

Do not Operate the inverter with wet hands 

Do not operate the Digital Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in a 

serious injury due to an electric shock. 



Contents 

1. Introduction ................................. 7 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking .......................................... 7 

1.2 Using of the instruction manual............................. 7 

1.3 Ordering codes ........................................................ 8 

1.4 Standards ................................................................ 8 

1.4.1 Product standard for EMC ...................................... 8 

1.5 Dismantling and scrapping.................................. 10 

1.5.1 Disposal of old electrical and electronic equipment 

10 

1.6 Glossary ................................................................ 10 

1.6.1 Abbreviations and symbols.................................. 10 

1.6.2 Definitions............................................................. 10 

2. Mounting ................................... 11 

2.1 Lifting instructions................................................ 11 

2.2 Stand-alone units................................................. 12 

2.2.1 Cooling .................................................................. 13 

2.2.2 Mounting schemes............................................... 13 

2.3 Cabinet mounting................................................. 14 

2.3.1 Cooling .................................................................. 14 

2.3.2 Mounting schemes............................................... 14 

3. Installation ................................ 17 

3.1 Before installation................................................ 17 

3.2 Cable connections................................................ 17 

3.2.1 Mains cables ........................................................ 17 

3.2.2 Motor cables......................................................... 17 

3.3 Connect motor and mains cables....................... 19 

3.4 Cable specifications............................................. 20 

3.5 Stripping lengths .................................................. 20 

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and fuses........................... 20 

3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables.. 21 

3.6 Thermal protection on the motor ........................ 21 

3.7 Motors in parallel ................................................. 21 

4. Getting Started .......................... 23 

4.1 Connect the mains and motor cables................. 23 

4.1.1 Mains cables ........................................................ 23 

4.1.2 Motor cables......................................................... 23 

4.2 Using the function keys ....................................... 24 

4.3 Remote control..................................................... 24 

4.3.1 Connect control cables ........................................ 24 

4.3.2 Switch on the mains............................................. 24 

4.3.3 Set the Motor Data............................................... 24 

4.3.4 Run the VSD ......................................................... 25 

4.4 Local control ......................................................... 25 

4.4.1 Switch on the mains............................................. 25 

4.4.2 Select manual control.......................................... 25 

4.4.3 Set the Motor Data............................................... 25 

4.4.4 Enter a Reference Value...................................... 25 

4.4.5 Run the VSD ......................................................... 25 

5. Control Connections ................... 27 

5.1 Control board........................................................ 27 

5.2 Terminal connections ........................................... 28 

5.3 Inputs configuration 

with the switches........................................................ 28 

5.4 Connection example ............................................. 29 

5.5 Connecting the Control Signals............................ 30 

5.5.1 Cables .................................................................... 30 

5.5.2 Types of control signals ........................................ 30 

5.5.3 Screening............................................................... 30 

5.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended connection? ....... 31 

5.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA)................................ 32 

5.5.6 Twisted cables....................................................... 32 

5.6 Connecting options ............................................... 32 

6. Applications ............................... 33 

6.1 Application overview ............................................. 33 

6.1.1 Cranes.................................................................... 33 

6.1.2 Crushers................................................................. 33 

6.1.3 Mills........................................................................ 34 

6.1.4 Mixers .................................................................... 34 

7. Main Features ............................ 35 

7.1 Parameter sets...................................................... 35 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter set ...................... 36 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter sets..................... 36 

7.1.3 Two motors and two parameter sets................... 36 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip .................................................... 37 

7.1.5 Reference priority.................................................. 37 

7.1.6 Preset references.................................................. 38 

7.2 Remote control functions ..................................... 38 

7.3 Performing an Identification Run......................... 40 

7.4 Using the Control Panel Memory.......................... 40 

7.5 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400]....... 40 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................... 40 

8. EMC and Machine Directive ........ 45 

8.1 EMC standards...................................................... 45 

8.2 Stop categories and emergency stop .................. 45 

9. Operation via the Control Panel .. 47 

9.1 General .................................................................. 47 

9.2 The control panel .................................................. 47 

9.2.1 The display............................................................. 47 

9.2.2 Indications on the display..................................... 48 

9.2.3 LED indicators ....................................................... 48 

9.2.4 Control keys........................................................... 48 

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key .............................. 48 

9.2.6 Function keys ........................................................ 50 

9.3 The menu structure .............................................. 50 

9.3.1 The main menu ..................................................... 50 

9.4 Programming during operation ............................ 51 

9.5 Editing values in a menu ...................................... 51 

9.6 Copy current parameter to all sets ...................... 51 

9.7 Programming example.......................................... 51 


10. Serial communication ................. 53 

10.1 Modbus RTU ......................................................... 53 

10.2 Parameter sets..................................................... 53 

10.3 Motor data ............................................................ 53 

10.4 Start and stop commands................................... 54 

10.5 Reference signal .................................................. 54 

10.5.1 Process value ....................................................... 54 

10.6 Description of the EInt formats ........................... 54 

11. Functional Description ................ 59 

11.1 Preferred View [100]............................................ 59 

11.1.1 1st Line [110]....................................................... 59 

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] ..................................................... 60 

11.2 Main Setup [200]................................................. 60 

11.2.1 Operation [210].................................................... 60 

11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]........................ 63 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B]................................. 64 

11.2.4 Motor Data [220] ................................................. 64 

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] ........................................ 69 

11.2.6 Parameter Set Handling [240]............................ 72 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions [250].................. 74 

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] ............................... 81 

11.3 Process and Application Parameters [300] ....... 83 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value [310] ........................ 84 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] ........................................ 84 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] .................................... 89 

11.3.4 Mechanical brake control.................................... 92 

11.3.5 Speed [340].......................................................... 95 

11.3.6 Torques [350]....................................................... 97 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] ..................................... 99 

11.3.8 PI Speed Control [370] ...................................... 100 

11.3.9 PID Process Control [380] ................................. 101 

11.3.10 Pump/Fan Control [390] ................................... 105 

11.3.11 Crane Option [3A0] ............................................ 111 

11.4 Load Monitor and Process Protection [400].... 114 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410]............................................ 114 

11.4.2 Process Protection [420]................................... 118 

11.5 I/Os and Virtual Connections [500].................. 119 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] ....................................... 119 

11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] ............................................ 126 

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] .................................... 128 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] ......................................... 132 

11.5.5 Relays [550] ....................................................... 134 

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560].................................. 135 

11.6 Logical Functions and Timers [600] ................. 136 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] ............................................ 136 

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620].......................................... 140 

11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630].......................................... 142 

11.6.4 Timer1 [640] ...................................................... 143 

11.6.5 Timer2 [650] ...................................................... 145 

11.7 View Operation/Status [700] ............................ 146 

11.7.1 Operation [710].................................................. 146 

11.7.2 Status [720] ....................................................... 148 

11.7.3 Stored values [730] ........................................... 151 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] ............................................ 152 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810]...................................... 152 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] ............................. 153 

11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] .......................................... 153 

11.9 System Data [900]............................................. 154 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] .................................................. 154 

12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 

157 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits.................................. 157 

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and remedial action ... 158 

12.2.1 Technically qualified personnel......................... 158 

12.2.2 Opening the variable speed drive ..................... 158 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a connected motor ... 158 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip ..................................................... 158 

12.3 Maintenance ...................................................... 161 

13. Options ................................... 163 

13.1 Options for the control panel............................. 163 

13.2 PC Tool software ................................................ 163 

13.3 Brake chopper.................................................... 163 

13.4 I/O Board ............................................................ 164 

13.5 Output coils ........................................................ 164 

13.6 Serial communication and fieldbus.................. 164 

13.7 Standby supply board option............................. 164 

13.8 Safe Stop option................................................. 165 

13.9 Crane option board ............................................ 167 

13.10 Encoder............................................................... 167 

13.11 PTC/PT100 ......................................................... 167 

14. Technical Data ......................... 169 

14.1 Electrical specifications related to model ........ 169 

14.2 General electrical specifications....................... 171 

14.3 Operation at higher temperatures .................... 172 

14.4 Dimensions and Weights................................... 173 

14.5 Environmental conditions.................................. 174 

14.6 Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands........... 174 

14.6.1 According IEC ratings ......................................... 174 

14.6.2 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings 

177 

14.7 Control signals.................................................... 179 

15. Menu List ................................ 181 


1. Introduction 

Omron SX-V is used most commonly to control and 

protect pump and fan applications that put high 

demands on flow control, process uptime and low 

maintenance costs. It can also be used for e.g. compressors 

and blowers. The used motor control 

method is V/Hz-control. Several options are available, 

listed in , that enable you to customize the variable 

speed drive for your specific needs. 

Users 

This instruction manual is intended for: 

• installation engineers 

• maintenance engineers 

• operators 

• service engineers 

Motors 

The variable speed drive is suitable for use with standard 

3-phase asynchronous motors. Under certain 

conditions it is possible to use other types of motors. 

Contact your supplier for details. 

1.1 Delivery and unpacking 

Check for any visible signs of damage. Inform your 

supplier immediately of any damage found. Do not 

install the variable speed drive if damage is found. 

The variable speed drives are delivered with a template 

for positioning the fixing holes on a flat surface. Check 

that all items are present and that the type number is 

correct. 

1.2 Using of the instruction 

manual 

Within this instruction manual the abbreviation “VSD” 

is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive 

as a single unit. 

Check that the software version number on the first 

page of this manual matches the software version in 

the variable speed drive. 

With help of the index and the contents it is easy to 

track individual functions and to find out how to use 

and set them. 

The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door, so 

that it is always easy to access in case of an emergency. 

Omron SX inverter manual Introduction 7

1.3 Ordering codes 

Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 give examples of the ordering code 

numbering used on SX variable speed drives. With this 

code number the exact type of the drive can be determined. 

This identification will be required for type specific 

information when mounting and installing. The 

code number is located on the product label, on the 

front of the unit. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

SX- D 6 160- E VF -OPTIONS 

Fig. 1 

Fig. 2 

Type code number 

Position n.chars 

Option letters 

Configuration 

1 3 Inverter family name “SX-” 

2 1 Protection class 

3 1 Voltage Class 

4 4 

Power in kW 

(normal duty rating) 

“A”=IP20 

“B”=IP00 

“D”=IP54 

“4”=400V 

“6”=690V 

“090-”=90kW 

... 

“1K0-”=1000kW 

5 1 Market “E”=Europe 

6 6 Control type 

7 0 to 13 

Options 

Control panel 

Built-in EMC filter 

Built-in brake 

chopper 

Standby power 

supply 

Safe stop 

Control type 

All options with single 

letter (see table 

below) 

“V”=V/Hz 

“F”=Direct Torque 

Control 

“-”+letters A to X 

Letter (“?” means no character) 

“?” = Standard control panel (Std.PPU) 

“A”= Blank control panel (Blank PPU) 

“?” = Standard EMC inside (Category C3) 

“B” = IT-Net (filter disconnected from 

ground) 

“?” = No brake chopper or DC-connection 

included 

“C” = Brake chopper & DC-connection 

included 

“D” = Only DC-connection included 

“?” = Not included 

“E” = Standby power supply included 

“?” = Not included 

“F” = Safe stop included 

“V”=V/Hz 

“F”=Direct Torque Control 

Coated boards 

Option board 

position 1 

Option board 

position 2 

Option board 

position 3 

Option board 

Fieldbus 

position 4 

Liquid Cooling 

Standard 

Marine 

Options 

Cabinet input 

options 

Cabinet output 

options 

Letter (“?” means no character) 

“?” = No coating 

“G” = Coated boards 

“?” = No option 

“H” = Crane I/O 

“I” = Encoder 

“J” = PTC/PT100 

“K” = Extended I/O“ 



“J” = PTC/PT100 




“J” = PTC/PT100 



“L” = DeviceNet 

“M” = Profibus-DP 

“N” = RS232/485 

“O” = EtherNet Modbus TCP 

“?” = No Liquid Cooling 

“P” = Liquid Cooling 

“?” = IEC 

“Q” = UL 

“?” = No marine option 

“R” = Marine option included 

“?” = No cabinet input options 

“S” = Main switch included 

“T” = Main contactor included 

“U” = Main switch + contactor included 

“?” = No cabinet output options included 

“V” = dU/dt filter included 

“W” = dU/dt filter + Overshoot clamp 

included 

“X” = Sinusfilter included 

1.4 Standards 

The variable speed drives described in this instruction 

manual comply with the standards listed in Table 1. 

For the declarations of conformity and manufacturer’s 

certificate, contact your supplier for more information. 

1.4.1 Product standard for EMC 

Product standard EN(IEC)61800-3, second edition of 

2004 defines the: 

First Environment (Extended EMC) as environment 

that includes domestic premises. It also includes 

establishments directly connected without intermediate 

transformers to a low voltage power supply network 

that supplies buildings used for domestic 

purposes. 

8 Introduction Omron SX inverter manual

Category C2: Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage

1.5 Dismantling and scrapping 

The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable 

material as aluminium, iron and plastic. Each drive 

contains a number of components demanding special 

treatment, for example electrolytic capacitors. The circuit 

boards contain small amounts of tin and lead. Any 

local or national regulations in force for the disposal 

and recycling of these materials must be complied 

with. 

1.5.1 Disposal of old electrical and 

electronic equipment 

This information is applicable in the European Union 

and other European countries with separate collection 

systems. 

1.6.2 Definitions 

In this manual the following definitions for current, 

torque and frequency are used: 

Table 3 

Definitions 

Name Description Quantity 

I IN Nominal input current of VSD A RMS 

I NOM Nominal output current of VSD A RMS 

I MOT Nominal motor current A RMS 

P NOM Nominal power of VSD kW 

P MOT Motor power kW 

T NOM Nominal torque of motor Nm 

T MOT Motor torque Nm 

f OUT Output frequency of VSD Hz 

f MOT Nominal frequency of motor Hz 

n MOT Nominal speed of motor rpm 

I CL Maximum output current A RMS 

This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates 

that this product shall be treated according to 

the WEEE Directive. It must be taken to the applicable 

collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic 

equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed 

of correctly, you will help prevent potentially negative 

consequences for the environment and human health, 

which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate 

waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials 

will help to conserve natural resources. For more 

detailed information about recycling this product, 

please contact the local distributor of the product. 

Speed Actual motor speed rpm 

Torque Actual motor torque Nm 

Sync 

speed 

Synchronous speed of the motor 

rpm 

1.6 Glossary 

1.6.1 Abbreviations and symbols 

In this manual the following abbreviations are used: 

Table 2 

Abbreviations 

Abbreviation/ 

symbol 

DSP 

VSD 

CP 

EInt 

UInt 

Int 

Long 

 

Description 

Digital signals processor 

Variable speed drive 

Control panel, the programming and presentation 

unit on the VSD 

Communication format 




The function cannot be changed in run mode 

10 Introduction Omron SX inverter manual

2. Mounting 

This chapter describes how to mount the VSD. 

Before mounting it is recommended that the installation 

is planned out first. 

• Be sure that the VSD suits the mounting location. 

• The mounting site must support the weight of the 

VSD. 

• Will the VSD continuously withstand vibrations 

and/or shocks? 

• Consider using a vibration damper. 

• Check ambient conditions, ratings, required cooling 

air flow, compatibility of the motor, etc. 

• Know how the VSD will be lifted and transported. 

Models 4090 to 4132 and 6090 to 6250 

Load: 56 to 74 kg 

2.1 Lifting instructions 

Note: To prevent personal risks and any damage to the 

unit during lifting, it is advised that the lifting methods 

described below are used. 

Fig. 3 Lifting model 4090-4132 and 6090-6250 

Omron SX inverter manual Mounting 11

Models 4160 to -4800 and 6315 to 61K0 

Lifting eye 

Fig. 4 

Remove the roof plate. 

Terminals for roof fan 

unit supply cables 

A 

Fig. 6 Lifting VSD model 4160-4800 and 6315-61K0 

DETAIL A 

2.2 Stand-alone units 

The VSD must be mounted in a vertical position 

against a flat surface. Use the template (delivered 

together with the VSD) to mark out the position of the 

fixing holes. 

Fig. 5 

Remove roof unit 

12 Mounting Omron SX inverter manual

2.2.2 Mounting schemes 

Membrane cable 

gland M60 

22,5 

240 

120 

Ø9(6x) 

284,5 

275 

Fig. 7 Mounting models 4090-4800 and 6090-61K0 

2.2.1 Cooling 

925 

952,50 

922,50 

Ø16(3) 

10 

30 

Fig. 7 shows the minimum free space required around 

the VSD for the models 4090-4800 and 6090-61K0 in 

order to guarantee adequate cooling. Because the 

fans blow the air from the bottom to the top it is advisable 

not to position an air inlet immediately above an 

air outlet. 

The following minimum separation between two variable 

speed drives, or a VSD and a non-dissipating wall 

must be maintained. Valid if free space on opposite 

side. 

Fig. 8 

314 

SX-V (400V): Model 4090 including cable interface 

for mains, motor and communication 

Table 4 

Mounting and cooling 


(mm) 

SX-V-wall, wall-one 

side 

(mm) 

4090-4132 

6090-6250 

4160-4800 

6315-61K0 

cabinet 

a 200 100 

b 200 0 

c 0 0 

d 0 0 

a 100 100 

b 100 0 

c 0 0 

d 0 0 

NOTE: When a 4160-4800 or 6315-61K0 model is placed 

between two walls, a minimum distance at each side of 

200 mm must be maintained. 


Table 5 

Flow rates cooling fans 

Cable dimensions 27-66 mm 

Frame SX-V Model Flow rate [m 3 /hour] 

K 4630 - 4800 

4800 

K69 6710 - 61K0 

10 

22.50 

Ø16(3x) 

300 

150 

Ø9(x6) 

30 

344,5 

335 

NOTE: For the models 4450-4500 and 6800-61K0 the 

mentioned amount of air flow should be divided equally 

over the two cabinets. 

2.3.2 Mounting schemes 

925 

952,50 

922,50 

2330 

314 

Fig. 9 

SX-V (400V): Model 4110 to 4132 (F) 

SX-V (690V): Model 6090 to 6160 (F69) including 

cable interface for mains, motor and communication 

2.3 Cabinet mounting 

2.3.1 Cooling 

If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet, the 

rate of airflow supplied by the cooling fans must be taken 

into consideration. 

Table 5 

Flow rates cooling fans 

600 

Fig. 10 SX-V (400V): Model 4160 to 4250 (G and H) 

SX-V (690V): Model 6200 to 6355 (H69) 

600 

Frame SX-V Model Flow rate [m 3 /hour] 

E 4090 510 

F 4110 - 4132 

800 

F69 6090 - 6160 

G 4160 - 4200 1020 

H 4220 - 4250 

1600 

H69 6200 - 6355 

I 4315 - 4400 

2400 

I69 6450 - 6500 

J 4450 - 4500 

3200 

J69 6600 - 6630 


2330 

2330 

1000 

600 

1200 

600 

Fig. 11 SX-V (400V): Model 4315 to 4400 (I) 

SX-V (690V): Model 6450 to 6500 (I69) 

Fig. 12 SX-V (400V): Model 4450 to 4500 (J) 

SX-V (690V): Model 6600 to 6630 (J69) 

2330 

2000 

Fig. 13 SX-V (400V): Model 4630 to 4800 (K) 

SX-V (690V): Model 6710 to 61K0 (K69) 

600 



3. Installation 

The description of installation in this chapter complies 

with the EMC standards and the Machine Directive. 

Select cable type and screening according to the EMC 

requirements valid for the environment where the VSD 

is installed. 

3.1 Before installation 

Read the following checklist and think through your 

application before installation. 

• External or internal control. 

• Long motor cables (>100m), refer to section Long 

motor cables. 

• Motors in parallel, refer to menu [213]. 

• Functions. 

• Suitable VSD size in proportion to the motor/application. 

• Mount separately supplied option boards according 

to the instructions in the appropriate option 

manual. 

If the VSD is temporarily stored before being connected, 

please check the technical data for environmental 

conditions. If the VSD is moved from a cold 

storage room to the room where it is to be installed, 

condensation can form on it. Allow the VSD to 

become fully acclimatised and wait until any visible 

condensation has evaporated before connecting the 

mains voltage. 

3.2 Cable connections 

3.2.1 Mains cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to 

local regulations. The cable must be able to carry the 

VSD load current. 

Recommendations for selecting mains 

cables 

• To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use 

screened mains cables. 

• Use heat-resistant cables, +60C or higher. 

• Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance 

with local regulations and the nominal current of 

the motor. See table 42, page 174. 

• The litz ground connection see fig. 15, is only necessary 

if the mounting plate is painted. All the variable 

speed drives have an unpainted back side and 

are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted 

mounting plate. 

Connect the mains cables according to the next figures. 

The VSD has as standard a built-in RFI mains filter 

that complies with category C3 which suits the 

Second Environment standard. 

Table 6 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

(DC-),DC+,R 

Mains and motor connection 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth (protected earth) 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

Brake resistor, DC-link 

connections (optional) 

NOTE: The Brake and DC-link Terminals are only fitted if 

the Brake Chopper Option is built-in. 

WARNING: The Brake Resistor must be 

connected between terminals DC+ and R. 

WARNING: In order to work safely, the mains 

earth must be connected to PE and the 

motor earth to . 

3.2.2 Motor cables 

To comply with the EMC emission standards the variable 

speed drive is provided with a RFI mains filter. The 

motor cables must also be screened and connected 

on both sides. In this way a so-called “Faraday cage” 

is created around the VSD, motor cables and motor. 

The RFI currents are now fed back to their source (the 

IGBTs) so the system stays within the emission levels. 

Recommendations for selecting motor 

cables 

• Use screened cables according to specification in 

table 7. Use symmetrical shielded cable; three 

phase conductors and a concentric or otherwise 

symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a 

shield. 

• When the conductivity of the cable PE conductor is 

• The screening must be connected with a large 

contact surface of preferable 360 and always at 

both ends, to the motor housing and the VSD 

housing. When painted mounting plates are used, 

do not be afraid to scrape away the paint to obtain 

as large contact surface as possible at all mounting 

points for items such as saddles and the bare 

cable screening. Relying just on the connection 

made by the screw thread is not sufficient. 

NOTE: It is important that the motor housing has the 

same earth potential as the other parts of the machine. 

• The litz ground connection, see fig. 16, is only necessary 

if the mounting plate is painted. All the variable 

speed drives have an unpainted back side and 

are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted 

mounting plate. 

Connect the motor cables according to U - U, V - V 

and W - W. 

Pay special attention to the following points: 

• If paint must be removed, steps must be taken to 

prevent subsequent corrosion. Repaint after making 

connections! 

• The fastening of the whole variable speed drive 

housing must be electrically connected with the 

mounting plate over an area which is as large as 

possible. For this purpose the removal of paint is 

necessary. An alternative method is to connect the 

variable speed drive housing to the mounting plate 

with as short a length of litz wire as possible. 

• Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever 

possible. 

• If the variable speed drive is mounted in a standard 

cabinet, the internal wiring must comply with the 

EMC standard. Fig. 15 shows an example of a 

VSD built into a cabinet. 

VSD built into cabinet 

NOTE: The terminals DC-, DC+ and R are options. 

Switches between the motor and the 

VSD 

If the motor cables are to be interrupted by maintenance 

switches, output coils, etc., it is necessary that 

the screening is continued by using metal housing, 

metal mounting plates, etc. as shown in the Fig. 15. 

Fig. 16 shows an example when there is no metal 

mounting plate used (e.g. if IP54 variable speed drives 

are used). It is important to keep the “circuit” closed, 

by using metal housing and cable glands. 

Litz 

RFI-Filter 

(option) 

Mains 

VSD 

Motor 

Metal EMC cable glands 

Output coil (option) 

Screened cables 

Unpainted mounting plate 

Metal connector housing 

Screen connection 

of signal cables 

Mains 

(L1,L2,L3,PE) 

Metal coupling nut 

Motor 

Brake resistor 

(option) 

Fig. 15 Variable speed drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate 

Fig. 16 shows an example when there is no metal 

mounting plate used (e.g. if IP54 variable speed drives 

are used). It is important to keep the “circuit” closed, 

by using metal housing and cable glands. 

PE 

Motor cable 

shield connection 

Fig. 14 Screen connection of cables. 

18 Installation Omron SX inverter manual

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

VSD 

maintenance switches) only switch if the current is 

zero. If this is not done, the VSD can trip as a result of 

current peaks. 

3.3 Connect motor and mains 

cables 

Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Output 

coils 

(option) 



Metal housing 

SX-D4090-EV (V) to SX-D4132-EV and SX- 

D6090-EV(690V) to SX-D4160-EV 

To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains 

cables to the VSD model SX-D4090-EV to SX-D4132- 

EV and SX-D6090-EV to SX-D4160-EV the cable 

interface plate can be removed. 


Metal cable gland 

Motor 

Mains 

Fig. 16 Variable speed drive as stand alone 

Connect motor cables 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD 

housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 8. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective 

motor terminal. 

5. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure 

with the fixing screws. 

6. Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact 

to the motor and brake chopper cable screens. 

Placing of motor cables 

Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables 

as possible, especially from control signals. The minimum 

distance between motor cables and control 

cables is 300 mm. 

Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other 

cables. 

The power cables should cross other cables at an 

angle of 90. 

Long motor cables 

If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m (40 

m for models 003-018), it is possible that capacitive 

current peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent. Using 

output coils can prevent this. Contact the supplier for 

appropriate coils. 

Switching in motor cables 

Switching in the motor connections is not advisable. In 

the event that it cannot be avoided (e.g. emergency or 

Fig. 17 Connecting motor and mains cables 

Clamps for screening 

Cable interface 

1. Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD 

housing. 

2. Put the cables through the glands. 

3. Strip the cable according to Table 8. 

4. Connect the stripped cables to the respective 

mains/motor terminal. 

5. Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten 

the cable in the clamp with good electrical contact 

to the cable screen. 

Omron SX inverter manual Installation 19

6. Put the cable interface plate in place and secure 

with the fixing screws. 

SX-D4160-EV (V) to SX-D4800-EV and SX- 

D6200-EV(690V) to SX-D61K0-EV 

3.4 Cable specifications 

Table 7 Cable specifications 

Cable 

Cable specification 

Mains 

Motor 

Control 

Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the 

voltage used. 

Symmetrical three conductor cable with concentric 

protection (PE) wire or a four conductor cable 

with compact low-impedance concentric shield 

for the voltage used. 

Control cable with low-impedance shield, 

screened. 

3.5 Stripping lengths 

Fig. 19 indicates the recommended stripping lengths 

for motor and mains cables. 

Table 8 

Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables 

Model 

Mains cable 

a 

(mm) 

b 

(mm) 

a 

(mm) 

Motor cable 

b 

(mm) 

c 

(mm) 

SX-D4090-EV 160 16 160 16 41 

SX-D4110-EV to 

SX-D4132-EV 

SX-D6090-EV to 


170 24 170 24 46 

L1 L2 L3 PE PE U V W 

Mains 

Motor 

Fig. 19 Stripping lengths for cables 

(06-F45-cables only) 

Fig. 18 Connecting motor and mains cables 

VSD models SX-D4160-EV to SX-D4800-EV and SX- 

D6200-EV to SX-D61K0-EV are supplied with Klockner 

Moeller K3x240/4 power clamps. 

For all type of wires to be connected the stripping 

length should be 32 mm. 

3.5.1 Dimension of cables and 

fuses 

Please refer to the chapter Technical data, section 

14.6, page 174. 


3.5.2 Tightening torque for mains 

and motor cables 

Table 9 

Model SX-D4090-EV 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Block, mm 2 95 150 

Cable diameter, mm 2 16-95 35-95 120-150 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 14 24 

Menu [224] 

Motor Current: 

Menu [225] 

Motor Speed: 

Menu [227] 

Motor Cos PHI: 

Add the current for the motors in parallel. 

Set the average speed for the motors in 

parallel. 

Set the average Cos PHI value for the 

motors in parallel. 

Table 10 

Model SX-D4110-EV to SX-D4132-EV and SX- 

D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV 

Brake chopper 

Mains/motor 

Block, mm 2 150 240 

Cable diameter, mm 2 35-95 120-150 35-70 95-240 

Tightening torque, Nm 14 24 14 24 

3.6 Thermal protection on the 

motor 

Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal 

fan. The cooling capacity of this built-in fan is dependent 

on the frequency of the motor. At low frequency, 

the cooling capacity will be insufficient for nominal 

loads. Please contact the motor supplier for the cooling 

characteristics of the motor at lower frequency. 

WARNING: Depending on the cooling 

characteristics of the motor, the application, 

the speed and the load, it may be necessary 

to use forced cooling on the motor. 

Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for 

the motor. Depending on the type of motor thermistor 

fitted, the optional PTC input may be used. The motor 

thermistor gives a thermal protection independent of 

the speed of the motor, thus of the speed of the motor 

fan. See the functions, Motor I 2 t type [231] and Motor 

I 2 t current [232]. 

3.7 Motors in parallel 

It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the 

total current does not exceed the nominal value of the 

VSD. The following has to be taken into account when 

setting the motor data: 

Menu [221] 

Motor Voltage: 

Menu [222] 

Motor Frequency: 

Menu [223] 

Motor Power: 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor voltage. 

The motors in parallel must have the 

same motor frequency. 

Add the motor power values for the 

motors in parallel. 

Omron SX inverter manual Installation 21


4. Getting Started 

This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you 

the quickest way to get the motor shaft turning. We 

will show you two examples, remote control and local 

control. 

We assume that the VSD is mounted on a wall or in a 

cabinet as in the chapter 2. page 11. 

First there is general information of how to connect 

mains, motor and control cables. The next section 

describes how to use the function keys on the control 

panel. The subsequent examples covering remote 

control and local control describe how to program/set 

the motor data and run the VSD and motor. 

4.1 Connect the mains and 

motor cables 

Dimension the mains and motor cables according to 

local regulations. The cable must be able to carry the 

VSD load current. 

RFI-Filter 

Mains 

Mains 

VSD 

Brake 

resistor 

(option) 

Metal cable gland 

Output 

coils 

(option) 



Metal housing 


Motor 

4.1.1 Mains cables 

7. Connect the mains cables as in Fig. 20. The VSD 

has, as standard, a built-in RFI mains filter that 

complies with category C3 which suits the Second 

Environment standard. 

Fig. 20 Connection of mains and motor cables 

4.1.2 Motor cables 

8. Connect the motor cables as in Fig. 20. To comply 

with the EMC Directive you have to use screened 

cables and the motor cable screen has to be connected 

on both sides: to the housing of the motor 

and the housing of the VSD. 

Omron SX inverter manual Getting Started 23

Table 11 

L1,L2,L3 

PE 

U, V, W 

Mains and motor connection 

Mains supply, 3 -phase 

Safety earth 

Motor earth 

Motor output, 3-phase 

WARNING: In order to work safely the mains 

earth must be connected to PE and the motor 

earth to . 

4.2 Using the function keys 

100 200 300 

210 

220 

To comply with the EMC standard, use screened control 

cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 or 

solid wire up to 2.5 mm 2 . 

9. Connect a reference value between terminals 7 

(Common) and 2 (AnIn 1) as in Fig. 22. 

10.Connect an external start button between terminal 

11 (+24 VDC) and 9 (DigIn2, RUNR) as in Fig. 22. 

Reference 

4-20 mA 

Start 

+ 

0V 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

221 

Fig. 21 Example of menu navigation when entering motor 

voltage 

step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting 

X3 

X2 

31 

32 

33 

51 

52 

41 

42 

43 

step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting 

step to next menu on the same level 

step to previous menu on the same level 

increase value or change selection 

decrease value or change selection 

4.3 Remote control 

In this example external signals are used to control the 

VSD/motor. 

A standard 4-pole motor for 400 V, an external start 

button and a reference value will also be used. 

4.3.1 Connect control cables 

Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting. 

In this example the motor/VSD will run with right rotation. 

Fig. 22 Wiring 

4.3.2 Switch on the mains 

Close the door to the VSD. Once the mains is 

switched on, the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 

seconds. 

4.3.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. The 

motor data is used in the calculation of complete 

operational data in the VSD. 

Change settings using the keys on the control panel. 

For further information about the control panel and 

menu structure, see the chapter 9. page 47. 

Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started. 

1. Press to display menu [200], Main Setup. 

2. Press and then to display menu [220], 

Motor Data. 

3. Press to display menu [221] and set motor voltage. 

4. Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . 

5. Set motor frequency [222]. 

24 Getting Started Omron SX inverter manual

6. Set motor power [223]. 

7. Set motor current [224]. 

8. Set motor speed [225]. 

9. Set power factor (cos ) [227]. 

10.Select supply voltage level used [21B] 

11.[229] Motor ID run: Choose Short, confirm with 

and give start command . 

The VSD will now measure some motor parameters. 

The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft 

does not rotate. When the ID run is finished after 

about one minute ("Test Run OK!" is displayed), 

press to continue. 

12.Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value. The 

default range is 4-20 mA. If you need a 0-10 V reference 

value, change switch (S1) on control board 

and set [512] Anln 1 Set-up to 0-10V. 

13.Switch off power supply. 

14.Connect digital and analogue inputs/outputs as in 

Fig. 22. 

15.Ready! 

16.Switch on power supply. 

4.3.4 Run the VSD 

Now the installation is finished, and you can press the 

external start button to start the motor. 

When the motor is running the main connections are 

OK. 

4.4 Local control 

Manual control via the control panel can be used to 

carry out a test run. 

Use a 400 V motor and the control panel. 

7. Select Keyboard using the key and press to 

confirm. 

8. Press to get to previous menu level and then 

to display menu [220], Motor Data. 

4.4.3 Set the Motor Data 

Enter correct motor data for the connected motor. 

9. Press to display menu [221]. 

10.Change the value using the and keys. Confirm 

with . 

11.Press to display menu [222]. 

12.Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is 

entered. 

13.Press twice and then to display menu [100], 

Preferred View. 

4.4.4 Enter a Reference Value 

Enter a reference value. 

14.Press until menu [300], Process is displayed. 

15.Press to display menu [310], Set/View reference 

value. 

16.Use the and keys to enter, for example, 

300 rpm. We select a low value to check the rotation 

direction without damaging the application. 

4.4.5 Run the VSD 

Press the key on the control panel to run the motor 

forward. 

If the motor is running the main connections are OK. 

4.4.1 Switch on the mains 

Close the door to the VSD. Once the mains is 

switched on, the VSD is started and the internal fan 

will run for 5 seconds. 

4.4.2 Select manual control 

Menu [100], Preferred View is displayed when started. 

1. Press to display menu [200], Main Setup. 

2. Press to display menu [210], Operation. 

3. Press to display menu [211], Language. 

4. Press to display menu [214], Reference Control. 

5. Select Keyboard using the key and press to 

confirm. 

6. Press to get to menu [215], Run/Stop Control. 

Omron SX inverter manual Getting Started 25

26 Getting Started Omron SX inverter manual

5. Control Connections 

5.1 Control board 

Fig. 23 shows the layout of the control board which is 

where the parts most important to the user are 

located. Although the control board is galvanically isolated 

from the mains, for safety reasons do not make 

changes while the mains supply is on! 

WARNING: Always switch off the mains 

voltage and wait at least 5 minutes to allow 

the DC capacitors to discharge before 

connecting the control signals or changing 

position of any switches. If the option External supply is 

used, switch of the mains to the option. This is done to 

prevent damage on the control board. 

X5 

X6 

X7 

X4 

1 

Option 

2 

3 

C 

Communication 

X8 

Control 

Panel 

Switches 

S1 S2 S3 S4 

I U I U I U I U 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

X1 

1 

Control 

signals 

AO1 AO2 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

11 

R02 

41 42 43 

Relay outputs 

NC C NO 

X2 31 32 33 51 52 

+10V AI1 

AI2 

AI3 

AI4 

-10V 

DI1 

DI2 

DI3 +24V 

NC 

C 

R01 

NO 

X3 

NO 

C 

R03 

Fig. 23 Control board layout 

Omron SX inverter manual Control Connections 27

5.2 Terminal connections 

The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is 

accessible after opening the front panel. 

The table describes the default functions for the signals. 

The inputs and outputs are programmable for 

other functions as described in chapter 11. page 59. 

For signal specifications refer to chapter 14. page 169. 

NOTE: The maximum total combined current for outputs 

11, 20 and 21 is 100mA. 

Table 12 

Control signals 

Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Outputs 

1 +10 V +10 VDC supply voltage 

6 -10 V -10 VDC supply voltage 

7 Common Signal ground 

11 +24 V +24 VDC supply voltage 



Digital inputs 

8 DigIn 1 RunL (reverse) 

9 DigIn 2 RunR (forward) 

10 DigIn 3 Off 





22 DigIn 8 RESET 

Digital outputs 

20 DigOut 1 Ready 

21 DigOut 2 Brake 

Analogue inputs 

2 AnIn 1 Process Ref 

3 AnIn 2 Off 

4 AnIn 3 Off 

5 AnIn 4 Off 

Analogue outputs 

13 AnOut1 Min speed to max speed 

14 AnOut2 0 to max torque 

Relay outputs 

31 N/C 1 

Relay 1 output 

32 COM 1 Trip, active when the VSD is in a 

33 N/O 1 

TRIP condition. 

Table 12 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

Relay 2 output 

Run, active when the VSD is 

started. 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 output 

52 N/O 3 Off 

NOTE: N/C is opened when the relay is active and N/O is 

closed when the relay is active. 

5.3 Inputs configuration 

with the switches 

The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configuration 

for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1, AnIn2, 

AnIn3 and AnIn4 as described in table 13. See Fig. 23 

for the location of the switches. 

Table 13 

Switch settings 

Input Signal type Switch 

AnIn1 

AnIn2 

AnIn3 

AnIn4 


Terminal Name Function (Default) 

Voltage 

Current (default) 

Voltage 


Voltage 


Voltage 


S1 

S1 

S2 

S2 

S3 

S3 

S4 

S4 

NOTE: Scaling and offset of AnIn1 - AnIn4 can be 

configured using the software. See menus [512], [515], 

[518] and [51B] in section 11.5, page 119. 

NOTE: the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can 

be configured using the software. See menu [530] 

section 11.5.3, page 128 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

I 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

U 

28 Control Connections Omron SX inverter manual

5.4 Connection example 

Fig. 24 gives an overall view of a VSD connection 

example. 

L1 

L2 

L3 

PE 

RFIfilter 

U 

V 

W 

Motor 

Alternative for 

potentiometer control** 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

0 - 10 V 

4 - 20 mA 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

22 

Optional 

+10 VDC 

AnIn 1: Reference 

AnIn 2 

AnIn 3 

Common 

AnIn 4 

AnOut 1 

-10 VDC AnOut 2 

Common DigOut 1 

DigIn 1:RunL* DigOut 2 

DigIn 2:RunR* 

DigIn3 

+24 VDC 

Relay 1 

Common 

DigIn 4 

DigIn 5 

DigIn 6 

Relay 2 

DigIn 7 

DigIn 8:Reset* 

DC+ 

R 

DC - 

12 

13 

21 14 

20 

21 

31 

32 

33 

41 

42 

43 

Relay 3 

51 

52 

Other options 

Fieldbus option 

or PC 

Option board 

* Default setting 

** The switch S1 is set to U 

Fig. 24 Connection example 

NG_06-F27 


5.5 Connecting the Control 

Signals 

5.5.1 Cables 

The standard control signal connections are suitable 

for stranded flexible wire up to 1.5 mm 2 and for solid 

wire up to 2.5 mm 2 . 

. 

5.5.2 Types of control signals 

Always make a distinction between the different types 

of signals. Because the different types of signals can 

adversely affect each other, use a separate cable for 

each type. This is often more practical because, for 

example, the cable from a pressure sensor may be 

connected directly to the variable speed drive. 

We can distinguish between the following types of 

control signals: 

Analogue inputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) normally 

used as control signals for speed, torque and 

PID feedback signals. 

Analogue outputs 

Voltage or current signals, (0-10 V, 0/4-20 mA) which 

change slowly or only occasionally in value. In general, 

these are control or measurement signals. 

Digital 

Voltage or current signals (0-10 V, 0-24 V, 0/4-20 mA) 

which can have only two values (high or low) and only 

occasionally change in value. 

Data 

Usually voltage signals (0-5 V, 0-10 V) which change 

rapidly and at a high frequency, generally data signals 

such as RS232, RS485, Profibus, etc. 

Relay 

Relay contacts (0-250 VAC) can switch highly inductive 

loads (auxiliary relay, lamp, valve, brake, etc.). 

Signal 

type 

Maximum wire size Tightening 

torque 

Cable type 


0.5 Nm 

Analogue Rigid cable: 

Digital 

0.14-2.5 mm 2 

Flexible cable: 

Data 0.14-1.5 mm 2 

Relay 0.25-1.5 mm 2 

Cable with ferrule: 

Screened 

Screened 

Screened 

Not screened 

Fig. 25 Connecting the control signals SX-D4090 

NOTE: The screening of control signal cables is 

necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in 

the EMC Directive (it reduces the noise level). 

NOTE: Control cables must be separated from motor and 

mains cables. 

Example: 

The relay output from a variable speed drive which 

controls an auxiliary relay can, at the moment of 

switching, form a source of interference (emission) for 

a measurement signal from, for example, a pressure 

sensor. Therefore it is advised to separate wiring and 

screening to reduce disturbances. 

5.5.3 Screening 

For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the 

screening is connected to both ends: the VSD side 

and the at the source (e.g. PLC, or computer). See 

Fig. 26. 

It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be 

allowed to cross mains and motor cables at a 90 


angle. Do not let the signal cable go in parallel with the 

mains and motor cable. 

5.5.4 Single-ended or double-ended 

connection? 

In principle, the same measures applied to motor 

cables must be applied to all control signal cables, in 

accordance with the EMC-Directives. 

For all signal cables as mentioned in section 5.5.2 the 

best results are obtained if the screening is connected 

to both ends. See Fig. 26. 

NOTE: Each installation must be examined carefully 

before applying the proper EMC measurements. 

Control board 

Pressure 

sensor 

(example) 

External control 

(e.g. in metal housing) 

Control consol 

Fig. 26 Electro Magnetic (EM) screening of control signal 

cables. 


5.5.5 Current signals ((0)4-20 mA) 

A current signal like (0)4-20 mA is less sensitive to disturbances 

than a 0-10 V signal, because it is connected 

to an input which has a lower impedance (250 

) than a voltage signal (20 k). It is therefore strongly 

advised to use current control signals if the cables are 

longer than a few metres. 

5.5.6 Twisted cables 

Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to interference 

if the cables carrying them are “twisted”. This 

is certainly to be recommended if screening cannot be 

used. By twisting the wires the exposed areas are 

minimised. This means that in the current circuit for 

any possible High Frequency (HF) interference fields, 

no voltage can be induced. For a PLC it is therefore 

important that the return wire remains in proximity to 

the signal wire. It is important that the pair of wires is 

fully twisted over 360°. 

5.6 Connecting options 

The option cards are connected by the optional connectors 

X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig. 23, 

page 27 and mounted above the control board. The 

inputs and outputs of the option cards are connected 

in the same way as other control signals. 


6. Applications 

This chapter contains tables giving an overview of 

many different applications/duties in which it is suitable 

to use variable speed drives from OMRON. Further 

on you will find application examples of the most common 

applications and solutions. 

s 

6.1 Application overview 

6.1.1 Pumps 

Challenge OMRON SX-V solution Menu 

High start currents require larger fuses and cables. 

Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost. 

Dry-running, cavitation and overheating damage 

the pump and cause downtime. 

Sludge sticks to impeller when pump has been running 

at low speed or been stationary for a while. 

Reduces the pump’s efficiency. 

Motor runs at same speed despite varying 

demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked pipe, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn impeller. 

Water hammer damages the pump when stopped. 

Mechanical stress on pipes, valves, gaskets, seals. 

Torque control reduces start current. Same fuses 

can be used as those required for the motor. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Sends 

warning or activates safety stop. 

Automatic pump rinsing function: pump is set to 

run at full speed at certain intervals, then return 

to normal speed. 

PID continuously adapts pressure/flow to the 

level required. Sleep function activated when 

none is needed. 

Pump Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning 

is sent or safety stop activated. 

Smooth linear stops protect the equipment. Eliminates 

need for costly motorized valves. 

331–336, 351 

411–419, 41C1– 41C9 

362–368, 560, 640 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

331–336 

6.1.2 Fans 




Starting a fan rotating in the wrong direction can be 

critical, e.g. a tunnel fan in event of a fire. 

Draft causes turned off fan to rotate the wrong way. 

Starting causes high current peaks and mechanical 

stress. 

Regulating pressure/flow with dampers causes 

high energy consumption and equipment wear. 


demands in pressure/flow. Energy is lost and 

equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a blocked filter, a 

damper not fully opened or a worn belt. 



Fan is started at low speed to ensure correct 

direction and proper function. 

Motor is gradually slowed to complete stop before 

starting. Avoids blown fuses and breakdown. 

Automatic regulation of pressure/flow with motor 

speed gives more exact control. 

PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function is activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection detects deviation. Warning 

is sent or safety stop activated. 

331–336, 351 

219, 341 

219, 33A, 335 

321, 354 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

Omron SX inverter manual Applications 33

6.1.3 Compressors 




Compressor is damaged when cooling media 

enters the compressor screw. 

Pressure is higher than needed, causing leaks, 

stress on the equipment and excessive air use. 

Motor runs at same speed when no air is compressed. 

Energy is lost and equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency and energy wasted due to e.g. 

the compressor idling. 



Overload situation is quickly detected and safety 

stop can be activated to avoid breakdown. 

Load Curve Protection function detects deviation. 

Warning is sent or safety stop activated. 

PID continuously adapts to the level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


331– 336, 351 

411–41A 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

6.1.4 Blowers 




Difficult to compensate for pressure fluctuations. 

Wasted energy and risk of production stop. 


demands. Energy is lost and equipment stressed. 

Process inefficiency due to e.g. a broken damper, a 

valve not fully opened or a worn belt. 



PID function continuously adapts pressure to the 

level required. 

PID continuously adapts air flow to level required. 

Sleep function activated when none is needed. 

Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation. 


331–336, 351 

320, 380 

320, 380, 342, 354 

411–419, 41C1–41C9 

34 Applications Omron SX inverter manual

7. Main Features 

This chapter contains descriptions of the main features 

of the VSD. 

7.1 Parameter sets 

Parameter sets are used if an application requires different 

settings for different modes. For example, a 

machine can be used for producing different products 

and thus requires two or more maximum speeds and 

acceleration/deceleration times. With the four parameter 

sets different control options can be configured 

with respect to quickly changing the behaviour of the 

VSD. It is possible to adapt the VSD online to altered 

machine behaviour. This is based on the fact that at 

any desired moment any one of the four parameter 

sets can be activated during Run or Stop, via the digital 

inputs or the control panel and menu [241]. 

Each parameter set can be selected externally via a 

digital input. Parameter sets can be changed during 

operation and stored in the control panel. 

NOTE: The only data not included in the parameter set is 

Motor data 1-4, (entered separately), language, 

communication settings, selected set, local remote, and 

keyboard locked. 

Define parameter sets 

When using parameter sets you first decide how to 

select different parameter sets. The parameter sets 

can be selected via the control panel, via digital inputs 

or via serial communication. All digital inputs and virtual 

inputs can be configured to select parameter set. 

The function of the digital inputs is defined in the menu 

[520]. 

Fig. 27 shows the way the parameter sets are activated 

via any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or 

Set Ctrl 2. 

11 +24 V 

10 Set Ctrl1 

16 Set Ctrl2 

Fig. 27 Selecting the parameter sets 

{ 

Parameter Set A 

Run/Stop 

- 

- 

Torques 

- 

- 

Controllers 

- 

- 

Limits/Prot. 

- 

-Max Alarm 

Set B 

Set C 

Set D 

(NG06-F03_1) 

Select and copy parameter set 

The parameter set selection is done in menu [241], 

Select Set. First select the main set in menu [241], 

normally A. Adjust all settings for the application. Usually 

most parameters are common and therefore it 

saves a lot of work by copying set A>B in menu [242]. 

When parameter set A is copied to set B you only 

change the parameters in the set that need to be 

changed. Repeat for C and D if used. 

With menu [242], Copy Set, it is easy to copy the 

complete contents of a single parameter set to 

another parameter set. If, for example, the parameter 

sets are selected via digital inputs, DigIn 3 is set to Set 

Ctrl 1 in menu [523] and DigIn 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in 

menu [524], they are activated as in Table 14. 

Activate the parameter changes via digital input by 

setting menu [241], Select Set to DigIn. 

Table 14 

Parameter set 

Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: The selection via the digital inputs is immediately 

activated. The new parameter settings will be activated 

on-line, also during Run. 

NOTE: The default parameter set is parameter set A. 

Omron SX inverter manual Main Features 35

Examples 

Different parameter sets can be used to easily change 

the setup of a VSD to adapt quickly to different application 

requirements. For example when 

• a process needs optimized settings in different 

stages of the process, to 

- increase the process quality 

- increase control accuracy 

- lower maintenance costs 

- increase operator safety 

With these settings a large number of options are 

available. Some ideas are given here: 

Multi frequency selection 

Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references 

can be selected via the digital inputs. In combination 

with the parameter sets, 28 preset references can be 

selected using all 4 digital inputs: DigIn1, 2 and 3 for 

selecting preset reference within one parameter set 

and DigIn 4 and DigIn 5 for selecting the parameter 

sets. 

Bottling machine with 3 different products 

Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference 

speeds when the machine needs to be set up. The 4th 

parameter set can be used for “normal” remote control 

when the machine is running at full production. 

Manual - automatic control 

If in an application something is filled up manually and 

then the level is automatically controlled using PID regulation, 

this is solved using one parameter set for the 

manual control and one for the automatic control. 

7.1.1 One motor and one parameter 

set 

This is the most common application for pumps and 

fans. 

Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have 

been selected: 

1. Enter the settings for motor data. 

2. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs 

and outputs 

7.1.2 One motor and two parameter 

sets 

This application is useful if you for example have a 

machine running at two different speeds for different 

products. 

Once default motor M1 is selected: 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Enter motor data in menu [220]. 

3. Enter the settings for other parameters e.g. inputs 

and outputs. 

4. If there are only minor differences between the settings 

in the parameter sets, you can copy parameter 

set A to parameter set B, menu [242]. 

5. Enter the settings for parameters e.g. inputs and 

outputs. 

Note: Do not change motor data in parameter set B. 

7.1.3 Two motors and two 

parameter sets 

This is useful if you have a machine with two motors 

that can not run at the same time, such as a cable 

winding machine that lifts up the reel with one motor 

and then turns the wheel with the other motor. 

36 Main Features Omron SX inverter manual

One motor must stop before changing to an other 

motor. 

1. Select parameter set A in menu [241]. 

2. Select motor M1 in menu [212]. 

3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters 

e.g. inputs and outputs. 

4. Select parameter set B in menu [241]. 

5. Select M2 in menu [212]. 

6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters 

e.g. inputs and outputs. 

7.1.4 Autoreset at trip 

For several non-critical application-related failure conditions, 

it is possible to automatically generate a reset 

command to overcome the fault condition. The selection 

can be made in menu [250]. In this menu the maximum 

number of automatically generated restarts 

allowed can be set, see menu [251], after this the VSD 

will stay in fault condition because external assistance 

is required. 

Example 

The motor is protected by an internal protection for 

thermal overload. When this protection is activated, 

the VSD should wait until the motor is cooled down 

enough before resuming normal operation. When this 

problem occurs three times in a short period of time, 

external assistance is required. 

The following settings should be applied: 

• Insert maximum number of restarts; set menu [251] 

to 3. 

• Activate Motor I 2 t to be automatically reset; set 

menu [25A] to 300 s. 

• Set relay 1, menu [551] to AutoRst Trip; a signal will 

be available when the maximum number of restarts 

is reached and the VSD stays in fault condition. 

• The reset input must be constantly activated. 

7.1.5 Reference priority 

The active speed reference signal can be programmed 

from several sources and functions. The table below 

shows the priority of the different functions with 

regards to the speed reference. 

Table 15 

Reference priority 

7.1.6 Preset references 

The VSD is able to select fixed speeds via the control 

of digital inputs. This can be used for situations where 

the required motor speed needs to be adapted to 

fixed values, according to certain process conditions. 

Up to 7 preset references can be set for each parameter 

set, which can be selected via all digital inputs that 

are set to Preset Ctrl1, Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3. 

The amount digital inputs used that are set to Preset 

Ctrl determines the number of Preset References 

available; using 1 input gives 2 speeds, using 2 inputs 

gives 4 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 8 speeds. 

Example 

The use of four fixed speeds, at 50 / 100 / 300 / 800 

rpm, requires the following settings: 

• Set DigIn 5 as first selection input; set [525] to Preset 

Ctrl1. 

• Set DigIn 6 as second selection input; set [526] to 

Preset Ctrl2. 

• Set menu [341], Min Speed to 50 rpm. 

• Set menu [362], Preset Ref 1 to 100 rpm. 



With these settings, the VSD switched on and a RUN 

command given, the speed will be: 

• 50 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are low. 

• 100 rpm, when DigIn 5 is high and DigIn 6 is low. 

• 300 rpm, when DigIn 5 is low and DigIn 6 is high. 

• 800 rpm, when both DigIn 5 and DigIn 6 are high. 

7.2 Remote control functions 

Operation of the Run/Stop/Enable/Reset functions 

As default, all the run/stop/reset related commands 

are programmed for remote operation via the inputs 

on the terminal strip (terminals 1-22) on the control 

board. With the function Run/Stp Ctrl [215] and Reset 

Control [216], this can be selected for keyboard or 

serial communication control. 

NOTE: The examples in this paragraph do not cover all 

possibilities. Only the most relevant combinations are 

given. The starting point is always the default setting 

(factory) of the VSD. 

Jog 

Mode 

Preset 

Reference 

Motor Pot 

Ref. Signal 

On/Off On/Off On/Off Option cards 

On On/Off On/Off Jog Ref 

Off On On/Off Preset Ref 

Off Off On Motor pot commands 


Default settings of the Run/Stop/ 

Enable/Reset functions 

The default settings are shown in Fig. 28. In this example 

the VSD is started and stopped with DigIn 2 and a 

reset after trip can be given with DigIn 8. 

STOP 

(STOP=DECEL) 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

t 

RunR 

Reset 

+24 V 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

ENABLE 

OUTPUT 

SPEED 

t 

(06-F104_NG) 

(or if Spinstart is selected) 

Fig. 28 Default setting Run/Reset commands 

The inputs are default set for level-control. The rotation 

is determined by the setting of the digital inputs. 

Enable and Stop functions 

Both functions can be used separately or simultaneously. 

The choice of which function is to be used 

depends on the application and the control mode of 

the inputs (Level/Edge [21A]). 

NOTE: In Edge mode, at least one digital input must be 

programmed to “stop”, because the Run commands are 

otherwise only able to start the VSD. 

Enable 

Input must be active (HI) to allow any Run signal. If the 

input is made LOW, the output of the VSD is immediately 

disabled and the motor will coast. 

! 

CAUTION: If the Enable function is not 

programmed to a digital input, it is considered 

to be active internally. 

Stop 

If the input is low then the VSD will stop according to 

the selected stop mode set in menu [33B] Stop Mode. 

Fig. 29 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop 

input and the Stop Mode=Decel [33B]. 

To run the input must be high. 

NOTE: Stop Mode=Coast [33B] will give the same 

behaviour as the Enable input. 

X 

Fig. 29 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input 

Reset and Autoreset operation 

If the VSD is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition, the 

VSD can be remotely reset by a pulse (“low” to “high” 

transition) on the Reset input, default on DigIn 8. 

Depending on the selected control method, a restart 

takes place as follows: 

Level-control 

If the Run inputs remain in their position the VSD will 

start immediately after the Reset command is given. 

Edge-control 

After the Reset command is given a new Run command 

must be applied to start the VSD again. 

Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously 

active. The Autoreset functions are programmed in 

menu Autoreset [250]. 

NOTE: If the control commands are programmed for 

Keyboard control or Com, Autoreset is not possible. 

Run Inputs Level-controlled. 

The inputs are set as default for level-control. This 

means that an input is activated by making the input 

continuously “High”. This method is commonly used if, 

for example, PLCs are used to operate the VSD. 

! 

CAUTION: Level-controlled inputs DO NOT 

comply with the Machine Directive, if the inputs 

are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

The examples given in this and the following paragraphs 

follow the input selection shown in Fig. 30. 


Stop 

RunL 

RunR 

Enable 

Reset 

+24 V 

X1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

See Fig. 30. The Enable and Stop input must be active 

continuously in order to accept any run-right or run-left 

command. The last edge (RunR or RunL) is valid. Fig. 

32 gives an example of a possible sequence. 

INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

Fig. 30 Example of wiring for Run/Stop/Enable/Reset inputs 

The Enable input must be continuously active in order 

to accept any run-right or run-left command. If both 

RunR and RunL inputs are active, then the VSD stops 

according to the selected Stop Mode. Fig. 31 gives an 

example of a possible sequence. 

INPUTS 

ENABLE 

STOP 

RUN R 

RUN L 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

Fig. 31 Input and output status for level-control 

(06-F103new_1) 

Run Inputs Edge-controlled 

Menu [21A] Start signal Level/Edge must be set to 

Edge to activate edge control. This means that an 

input is activated by a “low” to “high” transition or vice 

versa. 

NOTE: Edge-controlled inputs comply with the Machine 

Directive (see chapter EMC and Machine Directive), if 

the inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the 

machine. 

OUTPUT 

STATUS 

Right rotation 

Left rotation 

Standstill 

Fig. 32 Input and output status for edge-control 

(06-F94new_1) 

7.3 Performing an 

Identification Run 

To get the optimum performance out of your VSD/ 

motor combination, the VSD must measure the electrical 

parameters (resistance of stator winding, etc.) of 

the connected motor. See menu [229], Motor ID-Run. 

7.4 Using the Control Panel 

Memory 

Data can be copied from the VSD to the memory in 

the control panel and vice versa. To copy all data 

(including parameter set A-D and motor data) from the 

VSD to the control panel, select Copy to CP[244], 

Copy to CP. 

To copy data from the control panel to the VSD, enter 

the menu [245], Load from CP and select what you 

want to copy. 

The memory in the control panel is useful in applications 

with VSDs without a control panel and in applications 

where several variable speed drives have the 

same setup. It can also be used for temporary storage 

of settings. Use a control panel to upload the settings 


from one VSD and then move the control panel to 

another VSD and download the settings. 

NOTE: Load from and copy to the VSD is only possible 

when the VSD is in stop mode. 

VSD 

The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition. 

The pre-alarms act as a warning condition. All the 

alarms can be monitored on the digital or relay outputs. 

The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm 

levels whilst running: maximum alarm, maximum prealarm, 

minimum alarm and minimum pre-alarm. 

Fig. 34 gives an example of the monitor functions for 

constant torque applications. 

Fig. 33 Copy and load parameters between VSD and control 

panel 

7.5 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

7.5.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a 

load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect 

machines and processes against mechanical overload 

and underload, such as a conveyer belt or screw conveyer 

jamming, belt failure on a fan or a pump dry running. 

The load is measured in the VSD by the 

calculated motor shaft torque. There is an overload 

alarm (Max Alarm and Max Pre-Alarm) and an underload 

alarm (Min Alarm and Min Pre-Alarm). 

The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload 

and underload (pre-)alarms over the whole speed 

range. This function can be used in constant load 

applications where the torque is not dependent on the 

speed, e.g. conveyor belt, displacement pump, screw 

pump, etc. 

For applications with a torque that is dependent on the 

speed, the Load Curve monitor type is preferred. By 

measuring the actual load curve of the process, characteristically 

over the range of minimum speed to 

maximum speed, an accurate protection at any speed 

can be established. 


Torque [%] 

[4161] MaxAlarmMar (15%) 

[4171] MaxPreAlMar (10%) 

[41B] 

100% 

Default: T NOM or 

Autoset: T MOMENTARY 

[4181] MinPreAlMar (10%) 

[4191] MinAlarmMar (15%) 

Max Alarm 

Max PreAlarm 

Min Alarm 

Min PreAlarm 

Ramp-up phase 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) 

[414] Start Delay (0.2s) 

Stationary phase 

Stationary phase 

Ramp-down phase 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off 

[413] Ramp Alarm=On or Off [413] Ramp Alarm=On 

[411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min [411] Alarm Select=Max or Max0Min 

[4162] MaxAlarmDel (0.1s) 

t [s] 

[4172] MaxPreAlDel (0.1s) 

Must be

7.6 Pump sequencer function 

7.6.1 Introduction 

A maximum of 4 pumps can be controlled with the 

standard SX-V variable speed drive. 

If I/O Board options are installed, a maximum of 7 

pumps can be controlled. The I/O Board can also be 

used as a general extended I/O. 

The Pump Control function is used to control a 

number of drives (pumps, fans, etc., with a maximum 

of 3 additional drives per I/O-board connected) of 

which one is always driven by the SX-V. Other names 

for this kind of controllers are 'Cascade controller' or 

'Hydrophore controller'. 

Depending on the flow, pressure or temperature, additional 

pumps can be activated via the appropriate signals 

by the output relays of the SX-V and/or the I/O 

Board. The system is developed in such a way that 

one SX-V will be the master of the system. 

Select relay on the control board or on an option 

board. The relays are set to functions for controlling 

pumps. In the pictures in this section, the relays are 

named R:Function, e.g. R:SlavePump1, which means 

a relay on the control board or on an option board set 

to function SlavePump1. 

Set FLOW 

Feedback 

FLOW 


R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

AnIn 

PI D 

AnIn 

PM 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

All additional pumps can be activated via a VSD, soft 

starter, Y/ or D.O.L. switches. 

Set 

PRESSURE 

Feedback 

PRESSURE 


R:SlavePump1 

MASTER 

R:SlavePump2 

AnIn 

PI D 

AnIn 

PM 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

Pr essur e 

4 

3 

2 

1 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Power 

Flow 

Fig. 36 Pressure control with pump control option 

(50-PC-2_1) 

Pumps in parallel will operate as a flow controller, See 

Fig. 35. 

Pumps in series will operate as a pressure controller 

see Fig. 36. The basic control principle is shown in Fig. 

37. 

NOTE: Read this instruction manual carefully before 

commencing installation, connecting or working with 

the variable speed drive with Pump Control. 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump6 

FREQUENCY (master pump P) 

Add pump 

Pr essur e 

Stop pump 

Power 

Flow 

1 2 3 4 

Fig. 35 Flow control with pump control option 

(50-PC-1_1) 

P=on 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

P1=on P2=on P3=on P4=on P5=on P6=on 

FLOW / 

PRESSURE 

TIM E 

(50-PC-3_1) 

Fig. 37 Basic Control principle 


7.6.2 Fixed MASTER 

This is the default setting of the Pump Control. The 

SX-V controls the Master pump which is always running. 

The relay outputs start and stop the other pumps 

P1 to P6, depending on flow/pressure. In this configuration 

a maximum of 7 pumps can be controlled, see 

Fig. 38. To equalize the lifetime of the additional 

pumps it is possible to select the pumps depending 

on the run time history of each pump. 

R: SlavePump6 

R: SlavePump5 


R: SlavePump4 

R: SlavePump3 

MASTER 

R: SlavePump2 

R: SlavePump1 

R: MasterPump6 






P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

R:SlavePump6 

SX-V R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

MASTER R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

See menu: 

[393] to [396] 

[553] to [55C] 

Fig. 39 Alternating MASTER Control 

(NG_50-PC-4_1) 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

NOTE: The pumps MUST have all the same power. 

See menu: 

[393] Select Drive 

[39H] to [39N] Run Time 1 - 6, Pump 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

Fig. 38 Fixed MASTER control 

NOTE: The pumps MAY have different powers, however 

the MASTER pump MUST always be the largest. 

7.6.3 Alternating MASTER 

With this function the Master pump is not fixed to the 

SX-V all the time. After the VSD is powered up or 

started again after a stop or sleep mode the Master 

pump is selected via the relay set to function Master 

Pump. section 7.6.7 on page 49 shows a detailed wiring 

diagram with 3 pumps. The purpose of this function 

is that all pumps are used equally, so the lifetime 

of all pumps, including the Master pump, will be equalized. 

Maximum 6 pumps can be controlled with this 

function. 

7.6.4 Feedback 'Status' input 

In this example the additional pumps are controlled by 

an other kind of drive (e.g. soft starter, frequency 

inverter, etc.). The digital inputs on the I/O Board can 

be programmed as a "Error" input for each pump. If a 

drive fails the digital input will monitor this and the 

PUMP CONTROL option will not use that particular 

drive anymore and automatically switch to another 

drive. This means that the control continues without 

using this (faulty) drive. This function can also be used 

to manually stop a particular pump for maintenance 

purposes, without shutting down the whole pump system. 

Of course the maximum flow/pressure is then 

limited to the maximum pump power of the remaining 

pumps. 


See menu: 

[529] to [52H] Digital Input 

[554] to [55C] Relay 


MASTER 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

feedback 

inputs 

DI:Pump1Feedb 

DI:Pump2Feedb 

DI:Pump3Feedb 

other 

drive 

other 

drive 

other 

drive 

(NG_50-PC-6_1) 

Fig. 40 Feedback "Status" input 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 

7.6.5 Fail safe operation 

Some pump systems must always have a minimum 

flow or pressure level, even if the frequency inverter is 

tripped or damaged. So at least 1 or 2 (or maybe all) 

additional pumps must keep running after the inverter 

is powered down or tripped. This kind of "safe" pump 

operation can be obtained by using the NC contacts 

of the pump control relays. These can be programmed 

for each individual additional pump. In this example 

pumps P5 and P6 will run at maximum power if the 

inverter fails or is powered down. 

See menu: 

[554] to [55C] Relays 

[55D4] to [55DC] Mode 


MASTER 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

(50-PC-7_1) 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Fig. 41 Example of "Fail safe" operation 


7.6.6 PID control 

When using the Pump Control it is mandatory to activate 

the PID controller function. Analogue inputs AnIn1 

to AnIn4 can be set as functions for PID set values 

and/or feedback values. 

See menu: 

[381] to [385] 

[553] to [55C] 

[411] to [41C] 

Set 

Value 

Feedback 

Value 


MASTER 

AnIn 

PID 

AnIn 

R:SlavePump6 

R:SlavePump5 

R:SlavePump4 

R:SlavePump3 

R:SlavePump2 

R:SlavePump1 

PM 

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 

Flow/Pressure 

measurement 

(NG_50-PC-8_1) 

Fig. 42 PID control 


7.6.7 Wiring Alternating Master 

Fig. 43 and Fig. 44 show the relay functions 

MasterPump1-6 and SlavePump1-6. The Master and 

Additional contactors also interlock with each other to 

prevent dual powering of the pump and damage to 

the inverter. (K1M/K1S, K2M/K2S, K3M/K3S). Before 

running, the SX-V will select a pump to be Master, 

depending on the pump run times. 

CAUTION: The wiring for the Alternating 

Master control needs special attention and 

! should be wired exactly as described here, 

to avoid destructive short circuit at the output of the 

inverter. 

PE 

L1 

L2 

L3 

PE L1 L2 L3 


U V W 

K1S 

K2S 

K3S 

K1M 

K2M 

K3M 

(NG_50-PC-10_1) 

P1 

3~ 

P2 

3~ 

P3 

3~ 

Fig. 43 Power connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 

~ 

B1:R1 

Master 

Pump1 

B2:R1 

Slave 

Pump1 

B1:R2 

Master 

Pump2 

B2:R2 

Slave 

Pump2 

B1:R3 

Master 

Pump3 

B2:R3 

Slave 

Pump3 

K1S K1M K2S 

K2M 

K3S 

K3M 

K1M 

K1S 

K2M 

K2S 

K3M 

K3S 

N 

(NG_50-PC-11_3) 

Fig. 44 Control connections for Alternating MASTER circuit 

with 3 pumps 


7.6.8 Checklist And Tips 

1. Main Functions 

Start by choosing which of the two main functions to use: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

In this case the “Master” pump can be alternated, although this function needs slightly more complicated wiring than the 

“Fixed MASTER” function described below. The I/O Board option is necessary. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

One pump is always the master, only the additional pumps alternate. 

Notice that there is a big difference in the wiring of the system between these main functions, so it not possible to switch 

between these 2 functions later on. For further information see section 7.6.2, page 46. 

2. Number of pumps/drives 

3. Pump size 

If the system consists of 2 or 3 pumps the I/O Board option is not needed. However, this does mean that the following 

functions are not then possible: 

- "Alternating MASTER" function 

- With isolated inputs 

With the I/O Board option installed, the maximum number of pumps is: 

- 6 pumps if "Alternating MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.3 on page 46) 

- 7 pumps if "Fixed MASTER" function is selected. (see section 7.6.2, page 46) 

- "Alternating MASTER" function: 

The sizes of the pumps must be equal. 

- "Fixed MASTER" function: 

The pumps may have different power sizes, but the master pump (SX-V) must always have the greatest power. 

4. Programming the Digital inputs 

If the digital inputs are used, the digital input function must be set to Drive feedback. 

5. Programming the Relay outputs 

After the Pump controller is switched on in menu [391] the number of drives (pumps, fans, etc.) must be set in menu [392] 

(Number of Drives). The relays themselves must be set to the function SlavePump1-6 and if Alternate master is used, 

MasterPump1-6 as well. 

6. Equal Pumps 

If all pumps are equal in power size it is likely that the Upper band is much smaller than the Lower band, because the maximum 

pump discharge of the master pump is the same if the pump is connected to the mains (50Hz). This can give a very 

narrow hysteresis causing an unstable control area in the flow/pressure. By setting the maximum frequency of the inverter 

only slightly above 50Hz it means that the master pump has a slightly bigger pump discharge than the pump on the mains. 

Of course caution is essential in order to prevent the master pump running at a higher frequency for a longer period of 

time, which in turn prevents the master pump from overloading. 

7. Minimum Speed 

With pumps and fans it is normal to use a minimum speed, because at lower speed the discharge of the pump or fan will 

be low until 30-50% of the nominal speed (depending on size, power, pump properties, etc.). When using a minimum 

speed, a much smoother and better control range of the whole system will be achieved. 


7.6.9 Functional Examples of Start/ 

Stop Transitions 

Starting an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels 

and functions involved when a additional pump is 

started by means of the pump control relays. The 

starting of the second pump is controlled by one of 

the relay outputs. The relay in this example starts the 

pump directly on line. Of course other start/stop 

equipment like a soft starter could be controlled by the 

relay output. 

Flow Set view ref. [310] 

Feedback Flow 

time 

Speed 

Master pump 

Max speed 

[343] 

Upper band 

Transition Speed Start 

[39E] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Lower band 

Start delay [399] 

Settle time start [39D] 

time 

2nd pump 

Speed 

Start ramp depends 

on start method 

Start command 

time 

Fig. 45 Time sequence starting an additional pump 


Stopping an additional pump 

This figure shows a possible sequence with all levels 

and functions involved when an additional pump is 

stopped by means of the pump control relays. The 

stopping of the second pump is controlled by one of 

the relay outputs. The relay in this example stops the 

pump directly on line. Of course other start/stop 

equipment like a soft starter could be controlled by the 

relay output. 

Set view ref. [310] 

Feedback Flow 

time 

Speed 

Master pump 

Max speed 

[343] 

Upper band 

Transition Speed Stop 

[39G] 

Min speed 

[341] 

Lower band 

Stop delay [39A] 

Settle time stop [39F] 

time 

2nd pump 

Speed 

Stop ramp depends 

on start method 

Stop command 

time 

(NG_50-PC-20_1) 

Fig. 46 Time sequence stopping an additional pump 


8. EMC and Machine Directive 

8.1 EMC standards 

The variable speed drive complies with the following 

standards: 

EN(IEC)61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electronic 

power drive systems, part 3, EMC product standards: 

Standard: category C3, for systems of rated supply 

voltage< 1000 VAC, intended for use in the second 

environment. 

Optional: Category C2, for systems of rated supply 

voltage

46 EMC and Machine Directive Omron SX inverter manual

9. Operation via the Control Panel 

This chapter describes how to use the control panel. 

The VSD can be delivered with a control panel or a 

blank panel. 

9.1 General 

The control panel displays the status of the VSD and is 

used to set all the parameters. It is also possible to 

control the motor directly from the control panel. The 

control panel can be built-in or located externally via 

serial communication. The VSD can be ordered without 

the control panel. Instead of the control panel 

there will be a blank panel. 

NOTE: The VSD can run without the control panel being 

connected. However the settings must be such that all 

control signals are set for external use. 

9.2 The control panel 

Fig. 35 Control panel 

LC Display 

LEDs 

Control Keys 

Toggle Key 

Function Keys 

9.2.1 The display 

The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows, each 

with space for 16 characters. The display is divided 

into six areas. 

The different areas in the display are described below: 

Fig. 36 The display 

Area A: Shows the actual menu number (3 or 4 

digits). 

Area B Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or 

the 

VSD is set for Local operation. 

Area C: Shows the heading of the active menu. 

Area D: Shows the status of the VSD (3 digits). 

The following status indications are possible: 

Acc : Acceleration 

Dec : Deceleration 

I 2 t : Active I 2 t protection 

Run : Motor runs 

Trp : Tripped 

Stp : Motor is stopped 

VL : Operating at Voltage limit 

SL : Operating at Speed limit 

CL : Operating at Current limit 

TL : Operating at Torque limit 

OT : Operating at Temperature Limit 

LV : Operating at Low Voltage 

Sby : Operating from Standby power supply 

SST : Operating Safe Stop, is blinking 

when 

level 

Area E: 

motor 

Area F: 

menu. 

level 

A 

221T 

Motor Volt 

StpA 

M1: 400V 

D 

B 

E 

C 

F 

activated 

LCL : Operating with low cooling liquid 

Shows active parameter set and if it is a 

parameter. 

Shows the setting or selection in the active 

This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd 

menu. This area also shows warnings and 

Omron SX inverter manual Operation via the Control Panel 47

alarm 

messages. 

300 Process Appl 

StpA 

Fig. 37 Example 1st level menu 

220 Motor Data 

StpA 

Fig. 38 Example 2nd level menu 

221 Motor Volt 

Stp M1: 400V 

A 

Fig. 39 Example 3d level menu 

4161 Max Alarm 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Table 16 

RUN 

(green) 

Motor shaft 

rotates 

Motor speed 

increase/ 

decrease 

Motor 

stopped 

NOTE: If the control panel is built in, the back light of the 

display has the same function as the Power LED in Table 

16 (Blank panel LEDs). 

9.2.4 Control keys 

The control keys are used to give the Run, Stop or 

Reset commands directly. As default these keys are 

disabled, set for remote control. Activate the control 

keys by selecting Keyboard in the menus Ref Control 

[214] and Reset Ctrl [216]. 

If the Enable function is programmed on one of the 

digital inputs, this input must be active to allow Run/ 

Stop commands from the control panel. 

Table 17 

LED indication 

Control keys 

RUN L: 

gives a start with 

left rotation 

Fig. 40 Example 4th level menu 

9.2.2 Indications on the display 

The display can indicate +++ or - - - if a parameter is 

out of range. In the VSD there are parameters which 

are dependent on other parameters. For example, if 

the speed reference is 500 and the maximum speed 

value is set to a value below 500, this will be indicated 

with +++ on the display. If the minimum speed value is 

set over 500, - - - is displayed. 

9.2.3 LED indicators 

The symbols on the control panel have the following 

functions: 

Run 

Green 

Fig. 41 LED indications 

Table 16 

Symbol 

POWER 

(green) 

LED indication 

Trip 

Red 

Function 

Power 

Green 

ON BLINKING OFF 

Power on ---------------- Power off 

TRIP (red) VSD tripped Warning/Limit No trip 

STOP/RESET: 

RUN R: 

stops the motor or resets 

the VSD after a trip 

gives a start with 

right rotation 

NOTE: It is not possible to simultaneously activate the 

Run/Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely 

from the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

9.2.5 The Toggle and Loc/Rem Key 

This key has two functions: Toggle and 

switching between Loc/Rem function. 

Press one second to use the toggle 

function 

Press and hold the toggle key for more than five seconds 

to switch between Local and Remote function, 

depending on the settings in [2171] and [2172]. 

When editing values, the toggle key can be used to 

change the sign of the value, see section 9.5, page 

51. 

Toggle function 

Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily 

step through selected menus in a loop. The toggle 

loop can contain a maximum of ten menus. As default 

the toggle loop contains the menus needed for Quick 

Setup. You can use the toggle loop to create a quick- 

48 Operation via the Control Panel Omron SX inverter manual

menu for the parameters that are most importance to 

your specific application. 

NOTE: Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than 

five seconds without pressing either the +, - or Esc key, 

as this may activate the Loc/Rem function of this key 

instead. See menu [217]. 

Add a menu to the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to add to the loop. 

2. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while 

pressing the + key. 

Delete a menu from the toggle loop 

1. Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle 

key. 


pressing the - key. 

Delete all menus from the toggle loop 


pressing the Esc key. 

2. Confirm with Enter. The menu Preferred view [100] 

is displayed. 

Default toggle loop 

Fig. 42 shows the default toggle loop. This loop contains 

the necessary menus that need to be set before 

starting. Press Toggle to enter menu [211] then use 

the Next key to enter the sub menus [212] to [21A] 

and enter the parameters. When you press the Toggle 

key again, menu [221] is displayed. 

100 

511 Toggle loop 211 

341 

331 

Fig. 42 Default toggle loop 

Indication of menus in toggle loop 

Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a 

T in area B in the display. 

Loc/Rem function 

The Loc/Rem function of this key is disabled as 

default. Enable the function in menu [2171] and/or 

[2172]. 

With the function Loc/Rem you can change between 

local and remote control of the VSD from the control 

panel. The function Loc/Rem can also be changed via 

the DigIn, see menu Digital inputs [520] 

Change control mode 

1. Press the Loc/Rem key for five seconds, until 

Local? or Remote? is displayed. 

2. Confirm with Enter. 

3. Cancel with Esc. 

213 

221 

212 

Sub menus 

222 

Sub menus 

228 

Local mode 

Local mode is used for temporary operation. When 

switched to LOCAL operation, the VSD is controlled 

via the defined Local operation mode, i.e. [2171] and 

[2172]. The actual status of the VSD will not change, 

e.g. Run/Stop conditions and the actual speed will 

remain exactly the same. When the VSD is set to Local 

operation, the display will show L in area B in the display. 


The VSD will be started and stopped using the keys 

on the control panel. The reference signal can be controlled 

using the + and - keys on the keyboard, when 

in the menu [310] according to the selection in Keyboard 

Reference menu [369]. 

Remote mode 

When the VSD is switched to REMOTE operation, the 

VSD will be controlled according to selected control 

methods in the menu’s Reference Control [214], Run/ 

Stop Control [215] and Reset Control [216]. The actual 

operation status of the VSD will reflect the status and 

settings of the programmed control selections, e.g. 

Start/Stop status and settings of the programmed 

control selections, acceleration or deceleration speed 

according to the selected reference value in the menu 

Acceleration Time [331] / Deceleration Time [332]. 

To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the 

VSD control, a “Loc/Rem” function is available on the 

Digital Outputs or Relays. When the VSD is set to 

Local, the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active 

high, in Remote the signal will be inactive low. See 

menu Digital Outputs [540] and Relays [550]. 

9.3 The menu structure 

The menu structure consists of 4 levels: 

Main Menu 

1st level 

2nd level 

3rd level 

4th level 

The first character in the menu number. 

The second character in the menu number. 

The third character in the menu number. 

The fourth character in the menu number. 

This structure is consequently independent of the 

number of menus per level. 

For instance, a menu can have one selectable menu 

(Set/View Reference Value [310]), or it can have 17 

selectable menus (menu Speeds [340]). 

NOTE: If there are more than 10 menus within one level, 

the numbering continues in alphabetic order. 

9.2.6 Function keys 

The function keys operate the menus and are also 

used for programming and read-outs of all the menu 

settings. 

Table 18 

Function keys 

ENTER key: 

ESCAPE key: 

PREVIOUS key: 

NEXT key: 

- key: 

+ key: 

Fig. 43 Menu structure 

- step to a lower menu 

level 

- confirm a changed 

setting 

- step to a higher 

menu level 

- ignore a changed 

setting, without 

confirming 

- step to a previous 

menu within the same 

level 

- go to more significant 

digit in edit mode 

- step to a next menu 

within the same level 

- go to less significant 

digit in edit mode 

- decrease a value 

- change a selection 

- increase a value 

- change a selection 

4161 

4162 

Fig. 44 Menu structure 

NG_06-F28 

9.3.1 The main menu 

This section gives you a short description of the functions 

in the Main Menu. 

100 Preferred View 

Displayed at power-up. It displays the actual process 

value as default. Programmable for many other readouts. 

200 Main Setup 

Main settings to get the VSD operable. The motor 

data settings are the most important. Also option utility 

and settings. 


300 Process and Application Parameters 

Settings more relevant to the application such as Reference 

Speed, torque limitations, PID control settings, 

etc. 

400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process 

Protection 

The monitor function enables the VSD to be used as a 

load monitor to protect machines and processes 

against mechanical overload and underload. 

500 Inputs/Outputs and Virtual 

Connections 

All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here. 

600 Logical Functions and Timers 

All settings for conditional signal are entered here. 

700 View Operation and Status 

Viewing all the operational data like frequency, load, 

power, current, etc. 

800 View Trip Log 

Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory. 

900 Service Information and VSD Data 

Electronic type label for viewing the software version 

and VSD type. 

9.4 Programming during 

operation 

Most of the parameters can be changed during operation 

without stopping the VSD. Parameters that can 

not be changed are marked with a lock symbol in the 

display. 

NOTE: If you try to change a function during operation 

that only can be changed when the motor is stopped, the 

message “Stop First” is displayed. 

9.5 Editing values in a menu 

Most values in the second row in a menu can be 

changed in two different ways. Enumerated values like 

the baud rate can only be changed with alternative 1. 

2621 Baudrate 

Stp 38400 

Alternative 1 

When you press the + or - keys to change a value, the 

cursor is blinking to the left in the display and the value 

is increased or decreased when you press the appropriate 

key. If you keep the + or - keys pressed, the 

value will increase or decrease continuously. When 

you keep the key pressed the change speed will 

increase. The Toggle key is used to change the sign of 

the entered value. The sign of the value will also 

change when zero is passed. Press Enter to confirm 

the value. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp A 

2.00s 

Blinking 

Alternative 2 

Press the + or - key to enter edit mode. Then press 

the Prev or Next key to move the cursor to the right 

most position of the value that should be changed. 

The cursor will make the selected character blink. 

Move the cursor using the Prev or Next keys. When 

you press the + or - keys, the character at the cursor 

position will increase or decrease. This alternative is 

suitable when you want to make large changes, i.e. 

from 2 s to 400 s. 

To change the sign of the value, press the toggle key. 

This makes it possible to enter negative values. 

Example: When you press Next the 4 will blink. 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

4.00s 

Blinking 

Press Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the 

edit mode. 

9.6 Copy current parameter to 

all sets 

When a parameter is displayed, press the Enter key 

for 5 seconds. Now the text To all sets? is displayed. 

Press Enter to copy the setting for current parameter 

to all sets. 

9.7 Programming example 

This example shows how to program a change of the 

Acc. Time set from 2.0 s to 4.0 s. 

The blinking cursor indicates that a change has taken 

place but is not saved yet. If at this moment, the 

power fails, the change will not be saved. 

Use the ESC, Prev, Next or the Toggle keys to proceed 

and to go to other menus. 


100 0rpm 

Stp A 

0.0A 

Menu 100 appears 

after power-up. 

200 MAIN SETUP 

StpA 

Press Next for menu 

[200]. 

300 Process 

StpA 

Press Next for menu 

[300]. 

310 Set/View Ref 

StpA 

Press Enter for menu 

[310]. 

330 Run/Stop 

StpA 

Press Next two times 

for menu [330]. 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

2.00s 

Press Enter for menu 

[331]. 

331 Acc Time 

Stp A 

2.00s 

Blinking 

Keep key pressed 

until desired value has 

been reached. 

331 Acc Time 

StpA 

4.00s 

Save the changed 

value by pressing 

Enter. 

Fig. 45 Programming example 


10. Serial communication 

The VSD provides possibility for different types of serial 

communication. 

• Modbus RTU via RS232/485 

• Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet 

• Industrial Ethernet type Modbus/TCP 

10.1 Modbus RTU 

The VSD has an asynchronous serial communication 

interface behind the control panel. The protocol used 

for data exchange is based in the Modbus RTU protocol, 

originally developed by Modicon. the physical 

connection is RS232. The VSD acts as a slave with 

address 1 in a master-slave configuration. The communication 

is half-duplex. It has a standard no return 

zero (NRZ) format. 

The baud rate is fixed to 9600. 

The character frame format (always 11 bits) has: 

• one start bit 

• eight data bits 

• two stop bits 

• no parity 

It is possible to temporarily connect a personal computer 

with for example the software EmoSoftCom 

(programming and monitoring software) to the RS232 

connector on the control panel. This can be useful 

when copying parameters between variable speed 

drives etc. For permanent connection of a personal 

computer you have to use one of the communication 

option boards. 

NOTE: This RS232 port is not isolated. 

Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection 

depends on the ground pins of both ports 

being the same potential. Problems can 

occur when connecting two ports of e.g. 

machinery and computers where both ground pins are 

not the same potential. This may cause hazardous 

ground loops that can destroy the RS232 ports. 

The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanic 

isolated. 

The optional RS232/485 card is galvanic isolated. 

Fig. 46 Mounting frame for the control panel 

10.2 Parameter sets 

Communication information for the different parameter 

sets. 

The different parameter sets in the VSD have the following 

DeviceNet instance numbers and Profibus slot/ 

index numbers: 

Parameter 

set 

Modbus/DeviceNet 

Instance number 

Profibus 

Slot/Index 

A 43001–43556 168/160 to 170/205 

B 44001–44529 172/140 to 174/185 

C 45001–45529 176/120 to 178/165 

D 46001–46529 180/100 to 182/145 

Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 

43556. The parameter sets B, C and D contains the 

same type of information. For example parameter 

43123 in parameter set A contain the same type of 

information as 44123 in parameter set B. 

A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted 

into a Profibus slot/index number according to 

description in section section 11.8.2, page 153. 

10.3 Motor data 

Communication information for the different motors. 

Note that the control panel RS232 connection can 

safely be used in combination with commercial available 

isolated USB to RS232 converters. 

Motor 



Profibus 

Slot/Index 

M1 43041–43048 168/200 to 168/207 

Omron SX inverter manual Serial communication 53

Motor 

M2 44041–44048 172/180 to 174/187 

M3 45041–45048 176/160 to 176/167 

M4 46041–46048 180/140 to 180/147 

M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048. The M2, 

M3, and M4 contains the same type of information. 

For example parameter 43043 in motor M1 contain 

the same type of information as 44043 in M2. 

A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted 

into a Profibus slot/index number according to 

description in section section 11.8.2, page 153. 

10.4 Start and stop commands 

Set start and stop commands via serial communication.. 





Integer 

value 

42901 0 Reset 

42902 1 

42903 2 RunR 

42904 3 RunL 

Profibus 

Slot/Index 

Function 

Run, active together with 

either RunR or RunL to 

perform start. 

Note! Bipolar mode is activated if both RunR and RunL is 

active. 

10.5.1 Process value 

It is also possible to send the Process value over a bus 

(e.g. from a processor or temperature sensor). 

Set menu Process Source [321] to F(Bus). Use following 

parameter data for the process value: 

Default 0 

Range -32768 to 32767 

Corresponding to 

-100% to 100% ref 

Communication information 

Modbus /DeviceNet 


42906 

Profibus slot /Index 168/65 

Fieldbus format 

Modbus format 

Int 

Int 

Example: 

(See Fielbus option manual for detalied information) 

We would like to control the inverter over a bus system 

using the first two bytes of the Basic Control Message 

by setting menu [2661] FB Signal 1 to 49972. Further, 

we also want to transmit a 16 bit signed reference and 

process value. This is done by setting menu [2662] FB 

Signal 2 to 42905 and menu [2663] FB Signal 3 to 

42906. 

NOTE: It is possible to view the transmitted process 

value in control panel menu Operation [710]. The 

presented value is depending on settings in menus 

Process Min [324] and Process Max [325]. 

10.5 Reference signal 

When menu Reference Control [214] is set to “Com” 

the following parameter data should be used: 

Default 0 

Range -32768 to 32767 

Corresponding to 


Modbus /DeviceNet 


42905 

Profibus slot /Index 168/64 


Modbus format 

-100% to 100% ref 

Int 

Int 

The reference value is set in modbus number 42905. 

0-4000 h corresponds to 0-100% of actual reference 

value. 

10.6 Description of the EInt 

formats 

Modbus parameters can have different formats e.g. a 

standard unsigned/signed integer, or eint. EInt, which 

is described below. All parameters written to a register 

may be rounded to the number of significant digits 

used in the internal system. 

54 Serial communication Omron SX inverter manual

If a parameter is in Eint format, the 16 bit number 

should be interpreted like this: 

F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM 

F 

Format bit: 

0=Unsinged integer 

mode, 

1=Eint mode 

EEEE 

2 complement signed 

exponent 

MMMMMMMMMMM 2 complement signed 

mantissa. 

If the format bit is 0, then can a positive number 0- 

32767 be represented by bit 0-14. 

If the format bit is 1, then is the number interpreted as 

this: 

Value = M * 10^E 

NOTE: Parameters with EInt format may return values in 

both formats (F=0 or F=1). 

Example 

If you write the value 1004 to a register and this register 

has 3 significant digits, it will be stored as 1000. 

In the floating point format (F=1), one 16-bit word is 

used to represent large (or very small numbers) with 3 

significant digits. 

If data is read or written as a fixed point (i.e. no decimals) 

number between 0-32767, the 15-bit fixed point 

format (F=0) may be used. 

F=Format. 1=floating point format, 0=15 bit as 15-bit 

fixed point format. 

The matrix below describes the contents of the 16-bit 

word for the two different EInt formats: 

Value Binary 

-8 1000 

-7 1001 

.. 

-2 1110 

-1 1111 

0 0000 

1 0001 

2 0010 

.. 

6 0110 

7 0111 

The value represented by the EInt floating point format 

is m·10 e . 

To convert a value from the EInt floating point format 

to a floating point value, use the formula above. 

To convert a floating point value to the EInt floating 

point format, see the code float_to_eint below. 

Example 

The number 1.23 would be represented by this in EInt 

F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM 

1 1110 00001111011 

F=1 -> Eint 

E=-2 

M=123 

The value is then 123x10 -2 = 1.23 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

F=1 e3 e2 e1 e0 m10 m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0 

F=0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

Example of floating point format 

e3-e0 4-bit signed exponent. 

-8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111) 

m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa. 

-1024..+1023 (binary 

10000000000..01111111111) 

A signed number should be represented as a two 

complement binary number, like below: 


Programming example: 

typedef struct 

{ 

int m:11; // mantissa, -1024..1023 

int e: 4; // exponent -8..7 

unsigned int f: 1; // format, 1->special emoint format 

} eint16; 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

unsigned short int float_to_eint16(float value) 

{ 

eint16 etmp; 

int dec=0; 

while (floor(value) != value && dec=0 && value=-1000 && value=0) 

etmp.m=1; // Set sign 

else 

etmp.m=-1; // Set sign 

value=fabs(value); 

while (value>1000) 

{ 

etmp.e++; // increase exponent 

value=value/10; 

} 

value+=0.5; // round 

etmp.m=etmp.m*value; // make signed 

} 

Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp); 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value) 

{ 

float f; 

eint16 evalue; 

evalue=*(eint16 *)&value; 

if (evalue.f) 

{ 

if (evalue.e>=0) 

f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e); 

else 

f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e)); 

} 

else 

f=value; 

return f; 

} 

//--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 


Example of 15-bit fixed point format 

The value 72.0 can be represented as the fixed point 

number 72. It is within the range 0-32767, which 

means that the 15-bit fixed point format may be used. 

The value will then be represented as: 

B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 

Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed 

point format (F=0). 



11. Functional Description 

This chapter describes the menus and parameters in 

the software. You will find a short description of each 

function and information about default values, ranges, 

etc. There are also tables containing communication 

information. You will find the Modbus, DeviceNet and 

Fieldbus address for each parameter as well as the 

enumeration for the data. 

NOTE: Functions marked with the sign 

changed during Run Mode. 

Description of table layout 

Default: 

Selection or 

range 

cannot be 

Resolution of settings 

The resolution for all range settings described in this 

chapter is 3 significant digits. Exceptions are speed 

values which are presented with 4 significant digits. 

Table 19 shows the resolutions for 3 significant digits. 

Table 19 

Integer value of 

selection 

Description 

3 Digit Resolution 

0.01-9.99 0.01 

10.0-99.9 0.1 

100-999 1 

1000-9990 10 

10000-99900 100 

Menu no. 

name 

 

Menu 

11.1 Preferred View [100] 

This menu is displayed at every power-up. During 

operation, the menu [100] will automatically be displayed 

when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes. 

The automatic return function will be switched off 

when the Toggle and Stop key is pressed simultaneously. 

As default it displays the actual current. 

100 (1st Line) 

Stp A (2nd Line) 

Fig. 47 Display functions 

11.1.1 1st Line [110] 

Sets the content of the upper row in the menu [100] 

Preferred View. 

Default: 

Dependent on menu 

Process Val 

Process Val 0 Process value 

Speed 1 Speed 

Torque 2 Torque 

Process Ref 3 Process reference 

Shaft Power 4 Shaft power 

El Power 5 Electrical power 

Current 6 Current 

Output volt 7 Output voltage 

Frequency 8 Frequency 

DC Voltage 9 DC voltage 

Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature 

Motor Temp 11 Motor temperature 

VSD Status 12 VSD status 

Run Time 13 Run Time 

Energy 14 Energy 

Mains Time 15 Mains time 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43001 

Profibus slot/index 168/160 


Modbus format 

110 1st Line 

StpA 

Process Val 

UInt 

UInt 

100 0rpm 

Stp A 

0.0A 

Menu [100], Preferred View displays the settings made 

in menu [110], 1st line, and [120], 2nd line. See Fig. 

47. 

Omron SX inverter manual Functional Description 59

11.1.2 2nd Line [120] 

Sets the content of the lower row in the menu [100] 

Preferred View. Same selection as in menu [110]. 

Default: 

Current 

11.2 Main Setup [200] 

The Main Setup menu contains the most important 

settings to get the VSD operational and set up for the 

application. It includes different sub menus concerning 

the control of the unit, motor data and protection, utilities 

and automatic resetting of faults. This menu will 

instantaneously be adapted to build in options and 

show the required settings. 

11.2.1 Operation [210] 

Selections concerning the used motor, VSD mode, 

control signals and serial communication are 

described in this submenu and is used to set the VSD 

up for the application. 

Language [211] 

Select the language used on the LC Display. Once the 

language is set, this selection will not be affected by 

the Load Default command. 

Default: 

English 

English 0 English selected 

Svenska 1 Swedish selected 

Nederlands 2 

Dutch selected 

Deutsch 3 German selected 

Français 4 French selected 

Español 5 Spanish selected 

Руccкий 6 Russian selected 

Italiano 7 Italian selected 

Česky 8 Czech selected 





Modbus format 

120 2nd Line 

StpA 

Current 

211 Language 

Stp A English 

UInt 

UInt 

Select Motor [212] 

This menu is used if you have more than one motor in 

your application. Select the motor to define. It is possible 

to define up to four different motors, M1 to M4, in 

the VSD. 

Default: 

M1 0 

M2 1 

M3 2 

M4 3 

M1 


Drive Mode [213] 

This menu is used to set the control mode for the 

motor. Settings for the reference signals and read-outs 

is made in menu Process source, [321]. 

• V/Hz Mode, output speed [721] in rpm, is used 

when several motors in parallel of different type or 

size are connected or if parallel motors are not 

mechanically connected to the load. 


Motor Data is connected to selected 

motor. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

V/Hz 2 

V/Hz 

UInt 

UInt 

All control loops are related to frequency 

control. 

NOTE: All the functions and menu readouts 

with regard to speed and rpm (e.g. 

Max Speed = 1500 rpm, Min Speed=0 

rpm, etc.) remain speed and rpm, 

although they represent the output 

frequency. 




Modbus format 

212 Select Motor 

StpA 

M1 

213 Drive Mode 

StpA 

V/Hz 

UInt 

UInt 

60 Functional Description Omron SX inverter manual

Reference control [214] 

To control the speed of the motor, the VSD needs a 

reference signal. This reference signal can be controlled 

by a remote source from the installation, the 

keyboard of the VSD, or by serial or fieldbus communication. 

Select the required reference control for the 

application in this menu. 

Default: 

Remote 0 

Keyboard 1 

Com 2 

Option 3 

Remote 


The reference signal comes from the analogue 

inputs of the terminal strip (terminals 

1-22). 

Reference is set with the + and - keys on 

the Control Panel. Can only be done in 

menu Set/View reference [310]. 

The reference is set via the serial communication 

(RS 485, Fieldbus.) See section 

section 10.5 for further information. 

The reference is set via an option. Only 

available if the option can control the reference 

value. 

NOTE: If the reference is switched from Remote to 

Keyboard, the last remote reference value will be the 

default value for the control panel. 




Modbus format 

214 Ref Control 

StpA 

Remote 

UInt 

UInt 

Run/Stop Control [215] 

This function is used to select the source for run and 

stop commands. Start/stop via analogue signals can 

be achieved by combining a few functions. This is 

described in the Chapter 7. page 35. 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl 

StpA 

Remote 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Reset Contmrol [216] 

When the VSD is stopped due to a failure, a reset 

command is required to make it possible to restart the 

VSD. Use this function to select the source of the reset 

signal. 

Default: 

Remote 0 

Keyboard 1 

Com 2 

Remote + 

Keyb 

Com + 

Keyb 

Rem+Keyb 

+Com 

3 

4 

5 

Option 6 

Remote 


216 Reset Ctrl 

StpA 

Remote 

The command comes from the inputs of 

the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

The command comes from the command 

keys of the Control Panel. 

The command comes from the serial 

communication (RS 485, Fieldbus). 


the terminal strip (terminals 1-22) or the 

keyboard. 

The command comes from the serial 

communication (RS485, Fieldbus) or the 

keyboard. 


the terminal strip (terminals 1-22), the 

keyboard or the serial communication 

(RS485, Fieldbus). 

The command comes from an option. 

Only available if the option can control 

the reset command. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 

Remote 

Remote 0 

The start/stop signal comes from the digital 

inputs of the terminal strip (terminals 1-22). 

Keyboard 1 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel. 

Com 2 

The start/stop is set via the serial communication 

(RS 485, Fieldbus.) See Fieldbus or 

RS232/485 option manual for details. 

Option 3 The start/stop is set via an option. 


Local/Remote key function [217] 

The Toggle key on the keyboard, see section 9.2.5, 

page 48, has two functions and is activated in this 

menu. As default the key is just set to operate as a 

Toggle key that moves you easily through the menus in 

the toggle loop. The second function of the key allows 

you to easily swap between Local and normal operation 

(set up via [214] and [215]) of the VSD. Local 

mode can also be activated via a digital input. If both 

[2171] and [2172] is set to Standard, the function is 

disabled. 

Default: 

Standard 

Standard 0 Local reference control set via [214] 

Remote 1 Local reference control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local reference control via communication 





Modbus format 

Default: 

2171 LocRefCtrl 

StpA 

Standard 

UInt 

UInt 

2172 LocRunCtrl 

StpA 

Standard 

Standard 

Standard 0 Local Run/Stop control set via [215] 

Remote 1 Local Run/Stop control via remote 

Keyboard 2 Local Run/Stop control via keyboard 

Com 3 Local Run/Stop control via communication 

Lock Code [218] 

To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the 

setup of the VSD and/or process control, the keyboard 

can be locked with a password. This menu, 

Lock Code [218], is used to lock and unlock the keyboard. 

Enter the password “291” to lock/unlock the 

keyboard operation. If the keyboard is not locked 

(default) the selection “Lock Code?” will appear. If the 

keyboard is already locked, the selection “Unlock 

Code?” will appear. 

When the keyboard is locked, parameters can be 

viewed but not changed. The reference value can be 

changed and the VSD can be started, stopped and 

reversed if these functions are set to be controlled 

from the keyboard. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0–9999 

Rotation [219] 

218 Lock Code 

Stp 0 

A 

Overall limitation of motor rotation direction 

This function limits the overall rotation, either to left or 

right or both directions. This limit is prior to all other 

selections, e.g.: if the rotation is limited to right, a Run- 

Left command will be ignored. To define left and right 

rotation we assume that the motor is connected U-U, 

V-V and W-W. 

Speed Direction and Rotation 

The speed direction can be controlled by: 

• RunR/RunL commands on the control panel. 

• RunR/RunL commands on the terminal strip 

(terminals 1-22). 

• Via the serial interface options. 

• The parameter sets. 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Right 

Left 

Fig. 48 Rotation 


In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor. 

Default: 

R 1 

L 2 

R + L 


11.2.2 Remote Signal Level/Edge 

[21A] 

In this menu you select the way to control the inputs 

for RunR, RunL, Stop and Reset that are operated via 

the digital inputs on the terminal strip. The inputs are 

default set for level-control, and will be active as long 

as the input is made and kept high. When edge-control 

is selected, the input will be activated by the low to 

high transition of the input. 


Speed direction is limited to right rotation. 

The input and key RunL are disabled. 

Speed direction is limited to left rotation. 

The input and key RunR are disabled. 

R+L 3 Both speed directions allowed. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Level 0 

Edge 1 

Level 

UInt 

UInt 

The inputs are activated or deactivated 

by a continuous high or low signal. Is 

commonly used if, for example, a PLC is 

used to operate the VSD. 

The inputs are activated by a transition; 

for Run and Reset from “low” to “high”, 

for Stop from “high” to “low”. 




Modbus format 

219 Rotation 

StpA 

UInt 

UInt 

R+L 

21A Level/Edge 

StpA 

Level 

NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the 

Machine Directive (see the Chapter 8. page 45) if the 

inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine. 

11.2.3 Mains supply voltage [21B] 

WARNING: This menu must be set according 

to the VSD product lable and the supply 

voltage used. Wrong setting might damage 

the VSD or brake resistor. 

In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage connected 

to the VSD can be selected. The setting will be 

valid for all parameter sets. The default setting, Not 

defined, is never selectable and is only visible until a 

new value is selected. 

Once the supply voltage is set, this selection will not 

be affected by the Load Default command [243]. 

Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the 

setting of [21B]. 

NOTE: The setting is affected by the Load from CP 

command [245] and if loading parameter file via 

EmoSoftCom. 

Default: 

Not Defined 0 

Not defined 


Inverter default value used. Only valid if 

this parameter is never set. 

220-240 V 1 Only valid for SX-V-4 (400V) 

380-415 V 3 

Only valid for SX-V-4 (400V) 








Modbus format 

21B Supply Volts 

StpA 

Not defined 

UInt 

UInt 

! 

CAUTION: Level controlled inputs DO NOT 

comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs 

are directly used to start and stop the machine. 


11.2.4 Motor Data [220] 

In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the 

VSD to the connected motor. This will increase the 

control accuracy as well as different read-outs and 

analogue output signals. 

Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data 

entered will be valid for motor M1. If you have more 

than one motor you need to select the correct motor 

in menu [212] before entering motor data. 

NOTE: The parameters for motor data cannot be 

changed during run mode. 

NOTE: The default settings are for a standard 4-pole 

motor according to the nominal power of the VSD. 

NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

the sets is set for different motors. 

NOTE: Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can be 

revert to default setting in menu [243], Default>Set. 

Motor Frequency[222] 

Set the nominal motor frequency 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

 

50 Hz 

24-300 Hz 

1 Hz 





Modbus format 

222 Motor Freq 

Stp M1: 50Hz 

A 

Long, 1=1 Hz 

EInt 

Motor Power [223] 

Set the nominal motor power. If parallel motors, set 

the value as sum of motors power 

WARNING: Enter the correct motor data to 

prevent dangerous situations and assure 

correct control. 

 

223 Motor Power 

Stp M1: (P NOM )kW 

A 

Motor Voltage [221] 

Set the nominal motor voltage. 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

P NOM VSD 

1W-120% x P NOM 

3 significant digits 

Default: 

Range: 

Resolution 

 

400 V for SX-V -4 

690 V for SX-V -6 

100-700 V 

1 V 

NOTE: The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 

digit value with a resolution of 1 V. 





Modbus format 

221 Motor Volts 

Stp M1: 400V 

A 

Long, 

1=0.1 V 

EInt 

NOTE: The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 

3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higher 

powers. 





Modbus format 

P NOM is the nominal VSD power. 

Long, 

1=1 W 

EInt 

Motor Current [224] 

Set the nominal motor current. If parallel motors set 

the sum of the motor currents. 

 

224 Motor Curr 

Stp M1: (I NOM )A 

A 

Default: I NOM (see note section 11.2.4, page 64) 


Range: 

25 - 150% x I NOM 

Range: 2-144 





Modbus format 

I NOM is the nominal VSD current 

Motor Speed [225] 

Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed. 

 


Long, 

1=0.1 A 

EInt 

Default: n MOT (see note section 11.2.4, page 64) 

Range: 50 - 18000 rpm 

Resolution 1 rpm, 4 sign digits 

WARNING: Do NOT enter a synchronous (noload) 

motor speed. 

NOTE: Maximum speed [343] is not automatically 

changed when the motor speed is changed. 

NOTE: Entering a wrong, too low value can cause a 

dangerous situation for the driven application due to 

high speeds. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

1=1 rpm 

UInt 

Motor Poles [226] 

When the nominal speed of the motor is 500 rpm, 

the additional menu for entering the number of poles, 

[226], appears automatically. In this menu the actual 

pole number can be set which will increase the control 

accuracy of the VSD. 

 

Default: 4 

225 Motor Speed 

StpA 

M1: (n MOT )rpm 

226 Motor Poles 

Stp M1: 4 

A 





Modbus format 

Motor Cos [227] 

Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor). 

Default: 

Range: 0.50 - 1.00 


Motor ventilation [228] 

Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation. 

Affects the characteristics of the I 2 t motor protection 

by lowering the actual overload current at lower 

speeds. 


Long, 1=1 pole 

EInt 

cos NOM (see note section 11.2.4, page 

64) 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.01 

Modbus format 

Default: 

 

 

Self 

None 0 Limited I 2 t overload curve. 

EInt 

Self 1 Normal I2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands lower current at low speed. 

Forced 2 

Expanded I 2 t overload curve. Means that the 

motor stands almost the whole current also 

at lower speed. 




Modbus format 

227 Motor Cos 

Stp M1: A 

228 Motor Vent 

Stp M1: Self 

A 

UInt 

UInt 


When the motor has no cooling fan, None is selected 

and the current level is limited to 55% of rated motor 

current. 

With a motor with a shaft mounted fan, Self is selected 

and the current for overload is limited to 87% from 

20% of synchronous speed. At lower speed, the overload 

current allowed will be smaller. 

When the motor has an external cooling fan, Forced is 

selected and the overload current allowed starts at 

90% from rated motor current at zero speed, up to 

nominal motor current at 70% of synchronous speed. 

Fig. 49 shows the characteristics with respect for 

Nominal Current and Speed in relation to the motor 

ventilation type selected. 

xI nom for I 2 t 

Default: 

 

Off, see Note 

Off 0 Not active 

Short 1 


Parameters are measured with injected DC 

current. No rotation of the shaft will occur. 




Modbus format 

229 Motor ID-Run 

Stp M1: Off 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

1.00 

0.90 

0.87 

0.55 

Forced 

Self 

None 

NOTE: To run the VSD it is not mandatory for the ID RUN 

to be executed, but without it the performance will not 

be optimal. 

NOTE: If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the 

message “Interrupted!” will be displayed. The previous 

data do not need to be changed in this case. Check that 

the motor data are correct. 

0.20 0.70 2.00 

xSync Speed 

Fig. 49 I 2 t curves 

Motor Identification Run [229] 

This function is used when the VSD is put into operation 

for the first time. To achieve an optimal control 

performance, fine tuning of the motor parameters 

using a motor ID run is needed. During the test run the 

display shows “Test Run” blinking. 

To activate the Motor ID run, select “Short” and press 

Enter. Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel 

to start the ID run. If menu [219] Rotation is set to L 

the RunR key is inactive and vice versa. The ID run 

can be aborted by giving a Stop command via the 

control panel or Enable input. The parameter will automatically 

return to OFF when the test is completed. 

The message “Test Run OK!” is displayed. Before the 

VSD can be operated normally again, press the STOP/ 

RESET key on the control panel. 

During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not 

rotate. The VSD measures the rotor and stator resistance. 

. 

Motor Sound [22A] 

Sets the sound characteristic of the VSD output stage 

by changing the switching frequency and/or pattern. 

Generally the motor noise will go down at higher 

switching frequencies. 

Default: 


F 

E 0 Switching frequency 1.5 kHz 

F 1 Switching frequency 3 kHz 

G 2 Switching frequency 6 kHz 

H 3 

Advanced 4 

Switching frequency 6 kHz, random frequency 

(+750 Hz) 

Switching frequency and PWM mode 

setup via [22E] 




Modbus format 

 

22A Motor Sound 

Stp M1: F 

A 

UInt 

UInt 


NOTE: At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating may 

become necessary. If the heat sink temperature gets too 

high the switching frequency is decreased to avoid 

tripping. This is done automatically in the VSD. The 

default switching frequency is 3 kHz. 

Encoder Feedback [22B] 

Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed. 

This parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback 

from the motor to the VSD. 

Default: Off 

On 0 Encoder feedback enabled 

Off 1 Encoder feedback disabled 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Encoder Pulses [22C] 


This parameter describes the number of pulses per 

rotation for your encoder, i.e. it is encoder specific. For 

more information please see the encoder manual. 

 

 

Default: 1024 

Range: 5–16384 


22B Encoder 

Stp M1: Off 

A 

22C Enc Pulses 

Stp M1: 1024 

A 




Long, 1=1 pulse 

Modbus format 

EInt 

speed [712]. If you get the wrong sign for the value, 

swap encoder input A and B. 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

rpm 


Motor PWM [22E] 

Menus for advanced setup of motor 

modulation properties PWM = Pulse Width 

Modulation). 

PWM Fswitch [22E1] 

Set the PWM switching frequency of the VSD 


speed measured via the encoder 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Range 

Resolution 

 

3.00 kHz 

1.50 - 6.00kHz 

0.01kHz 

Int 

Int 




Modbus format 

22D Enc Speed 

Stp M1: XXrpm 

A 

22E1 PWM Fswitch 

Stp 3.00kHz 

A 

Long, 1=1Hz 

EInt 

Encoder Speed [22D] 


This parameter shows the measured motor speed. To 

check if the encoder is correctly installed, set Encoder 

feedback [22B] to Off, run the VSD at any speed and 

compare with the value in this menu. The value in this 

menu [22D] should be about the same as the motor 


PWM Mode [22E2] 

Default: 

Standard 

Standard 0 Standard 

Sine Filt 1 


PWM Random [22E3] 


Sine Filter mode for use with output Sine 

Filters 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Random modulation is Off. 

On 1 

UInt 

UInt 

Random modulation is active. Random frequency 

variation range is ± 1/8 of level set 

in [E22E1]. 




Modbus format 

22E2 PWM Mode 

Stp Standard 

A 

22E3 PWM Random 

Stp Off 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

11.2.5 Motor Protection [230] 

This function protects the motor against overload 

based on the standard IEC 60947-4-2. 

Motor I 2 t Type [231] 

The motor protection function makes it possible to 

protect the motor from overload as published in the 

standard IEC 60947-4-2. It does this using Motor I2t 

Current, [232] as a reference. The Motor I2t Time [233] 

is used to define the time behaviour of the function. 

The current set in [232] can be delivered infinite in 

time. If for instance in [233] a time of 1000 s is chosen 

the upper curve of Fig. 50 is valid. The value on the x- 

axis is the multiple of the current chosen in [232]. The 

time [233] is the time that an overloaded motor is 

switched off or is reduced in power at 1.2 times the 

current set in [232]. 

Default: Trip 

Off 0 I 2 t motor protection is not active. 

Trip 1 

Limit 2 


Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

Sets the current limit for the motor I 2 t protection. 


When the I 2 t time is exceeded, the VSD will 

trip on “Motor I 2 t”. 

This mode helps to keep the inverter running 

when the Motor I2t function is just 

before tripping the VSD. The trip is 

replaced by current limiting with a maximum 

current level set by the value out of 

the menu [232]. In this way, if the reduced 

current can drive the load, the VSD continues 

running. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: When Mot I2t Type=Limit, the VSD can control the 

speed < MinSpeed to reduce the motor current. 

Default: 

Range: 

100% of I MOT 

0–150% of I MOT 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1% 

Modbus format 

231 Mot I 2 t Type 

Stp M1: Trip 

A 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 

Stp 100% 

A 

EInt 

NOTE: When the selection Limit is set in menu [231], the 

value must be above the no-load current of the motor. 


Motor I 2 t Time [233] 

Sets the time of the I 2 t function. After this time the limit 

for the I 2 t is reached if operating with 120% of the I 2 t 

current value. Valid when start from 0 rpm. 

NOTE: Not the time constant of the motor. 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 

Stp M1: 60s 

A 

Default: 

Range: 

60 s 

60–1200 s 

100000 

10000 

t [s] 

1000 

1000 s (120%) 

100 

240 s (120%) 

480 s (120%) 

60 s (120%) 

120 s (120%) 

10 

Fig. 50 I 2 t function 

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 

Actual output current/ I 2 t-current 

i / I2t-current 

Fig. 50 shows how the function integrates the square 

of the motor current according to the Mot I 2 t Curr 

[232] and the Mot I 2 t Time [233]. 

When the selection Trip is set in menu [231] the VSD 

trips if this limit is exceeded. 

When the selection Limit is set in menu [231] the VSD 

reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95% or 

closer to the limit, so that the limit cannot be 

exceeded. 

NOTE: If it is not possible to reduce the current, the VSD 

will trip after exceeding 110% of the limit. 

Example 

In Fig. 50 the thick grey line shows the following example. 

• Menu [232] Mot I 2 t Curr is set to 100%. 

1.2 x 100% = 120% 

• Menu [233] Mot I 2 t Time is set to 1000 s. 

This means that the VSD will trip or reduce after 1000 

s if the current is 1.2 times of 100% nominal motor 

current. 

Thermal Protection [234] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. 

Set the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor. 

The motor thermistors (PTC) must comply with DIN 

44081/44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/ 

PT100 option board. 


Menu [234] PTC contains functions to enable or disable 

the PTC input. 

Default: 

Off 0 

PTC 1 

PT100 2 

PTC+PT100 3 

Off 


Motor Class [235] 

Only visible if the PTC/PT100 option board is installed. 

Set the class of motor used. The trip levels for the 

PT100 sensor will automatically be set according to 

the setting in this menu. 


PTC and PT100 motor protection are disabled. 

Enables the PTC protection of the motor 

via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PT100 protection for the 

motor via the insulated option board. 

Enables the PTC protection as well as the 

PT100 protection for the motor via the 

insulated option board. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: PTC option and PT100 selections can only be 

selected when the option board is mounted. 

Default: 

A 100C 0 

E 115C 1 

B 120C 2 

F 140C 3 

F Nema 145C 4 

H 165C 5 

F 140C 




Modbus format 

234 Thermal Prot 

StpA 

Off 

235 Mot Class 

StpA 

F 140C 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100. 

PT100 Inputs [236] 

Sets which of PT100 inputs that should be used for 

thermal protection. Deselecting not used PT100 

inputs on the PTC/PT100 option board in order to 

ignore those inputs, i.e. extra external wiring is not 

needed if port is not used. 

Default: PT100 1+2+3 

Selection: 


PT100 1, PT100 2, PT100 1+2, PT100 

3, PT100 1+3, PT100 2+3, PT100 

1+2+3 

PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection 


PT100 1+2 3 Channel 1+2 used for PT100 protection 




PT100 1+2+3 7 

Channel 1+2+3 used for PT100 protection 




Modbus format 

236 PT100 Inputs 

Stp PT100 1+2+3 

A 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: This menu is only valid for PT 100 thermal 

protection. 

Motor PTC [237] 

In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is 

enabled. This PTC input complies with DIN 44081/ 

44082. Please refer to the manual for the PTC/PT100 

option board for electrical specification. 

This menu is only visible if a PTC (or resistor

2. Enable input by setting menu [237] Motor 

PTC=On. 

If enabled and

The active set can be viewed with function [721] FI 

status. 

NOTE: Parameter set cannot be changed during run if 

this also would imply a change of the motor set (M2- 

M4). 

Copy Set [242] 

This function copies the content of a parameter set 

into another parameter set. 

Default: A>B 

A>B 0 Copy set A to set B 

A>C 1 Copy set A to set C 

A>D 2 Copy set A to set D 

B>A 3 Copy set B to set A 

B>C 4 Copy set B to set C 

B>D 5 Copy set B to set D 

C>A 6 Copy set C to set A 

C>B 7 Copy set C to set B 

C>D 8 Copy set C to set D 

D>A 9 Copy set D to set A 

D>B 10 Copy set D to set B 

D>C 11 Copy set D to set C 





Modbus format 

242 Copy Set 

StpA 

A>B 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into the other set. 

A>B means that the content of parameter set A is 

copied into parameter set B. 

Load Default Values Into Set [243] 

With this function three different levels (factory settings) 

can be selected for the four parameter sets. 

When loading the default settings, all changes made in 

the software are set to factory settings. This function 

also includes selections for loading default settings to 

the four different Motor Data Sets. 

Default: 

A 0 

B 1 

C 2 

D 3 

ABCD 4 

Factory 5 

M1 6 

M2 7 

M3 8 

M4 9 

M1234 10 


A 

Only the selected parameter set will revert 

to its default settings. 

All four parameter sets will revert to the 

default settings. 

All settings, except [211], [221]-[22D], 

[261], [3A1] and [923], will revert to the 


Only the selected motor set will revert to its 


All four motor sets will revert to default settnings. 




Modbus format 

243 Default>Set 

StpA 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus 

are not regarded as settings and will be unaffected. 

NOTE: If “Factory” is selected, the message “Sure?” is 

displayed. Press the + key to display “Yes” and then 

Enter to confirm. 

A 

NOTE: The parameters in menu [220], Motor data, are 

not affected by loading defaults when restoring 

parameter sets A–D. 


Copy All Settings to Control Panel [244] 

All the settings can be copied into the control panel 

including the motor data. Start commands will be 

ignored during copying. 

Default: 

No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be copied 

Copy 1 Copy all settings 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: The actual value of menu [310] will not be copied 

into control panel memory set. 

Load Settings from Control Panel [245] 

This function can load all four parameter sets from the 

control panel to the VSD. Parameter sets from the 

source VSD are copied to all parameter sets in the target 

VSD, i.e. A to A, B to B, C to C and D to D. 

Start commands will be ignored during loading. 

Default: 

No Copy 

No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded. 

A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded. 

B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded. 

C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded. 

D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded. 

ABCD 5 

A+Mot 6 

B+Mot 7 

C+Mot 8 

D+Mot 9 

 

 

ABCD+Mot 10 

244 Copy to CP 

StpA 

No Copy 

245 Load from CP 

StpA 

No Copy 

Data from parameter sets A, B, C and D are 

loaded. 

Parameter set A and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set B and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set C and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter set D and Motor data are 

loaded. 

Parameter sets A, B, C, D and Motor data 

are loaded. 

M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded. 




M1M2M3 

M4 

15 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded. 

All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel. 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: Loading from the control panel will not affect the 

value in menu [310]. 

11.2.7 Trip Autoreset/Trip Conditions 

[250] 

The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that 

do not affect the process will be automatically reset. 

Only when the failure keeps on coming back, recurring 

at defined times and therefore cannot be solved by the 

VSD, will the unit give an alarm to inform the operator 

that attention is required. 

For all trip functions that can be activated by the user 

you can select to control the motor down to zero 

speed according to set deceleration ramp to avoid 

water hammer. 

Also see section 12.2, page 158. 

Autoreset example: 

In an application it is known that the main supply voltage 

sometimes disappears for a very short time, a socalled 

“dip”. That will cause the VSD to trip an “Undervoltage 

alarm”. Using the Autoreset function, this trip 

will be acknowledged automatically. 

• Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset 

input continuously high. 

• Activate the Autoreset function in the menu [251], 

Number of trips. 

• Select in menus [252] to [25N] the Trip condition 

that are allowed to be automatically reset by the 

Autoreset function after the set delay time has 

expired. 


Number of Trips [251] 

Any number set above 0 activates the Autoreset. This 

means that after a trip, the VSD will restart automatically 

according to the number of attempts selected. 

No restart attempts will take place unless all conditions 

are normal. 

If the Autoreset counter (not visible) contains more 

trips than the selected number of attempts, the 

Autoreset cycle will be interrupted. No Autoreset will 

then take place. 

If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes, the 

Autoreset counter decreases by one. 

If the maximum number of trips has been reached, the 

trip message hour counter is marked with an “A”. 

If the Autoreset is full then the VSD must be reset by a 

normal Reset. 

Example: 

• Autoreset = 5 

• Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur 

• At the 6th trip there is no Autoreset, because the 

Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already. 

• To reset, apply a normal reset: set the reset input 

high to low and high again to maintain the Autoreset 

function. The counter is reset. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 (no Autoreset) 

0–10 attempts 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp 

time. 

Over temperature [252] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone. 

When the time delay has elapsed, the alarm will be 

reset if the function is active. 

Default: 

251 No of Trips 

Stp 0 

A 

252 Overtemp 

StpA 

Off 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Overvolt D [253] 





Overvolt G [254] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone 




Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 


time. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 


time. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

253 Overvolt D 

Stp A 

Off 

254 Overvolt G 

Stp A 

Off 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Overvolt [255] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Motor Lost [256] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

NOTE: Only visible when Motor Lost is selected. 


255 Overvolt 

Stp A 

Off 

256 Motor Lost 

Stp A 

Off 




Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Locked Rotor [257] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Power Fault [258] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

257 Locked Rotor 

Stp A 

Off 

258 Power Fault 

Stp A 

Off 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Undervoltage [259] 




259 Undervoltage 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 






Modbus format 

Motor I 2 t [25A] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

25A Motor I 2 t 

Stp A 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Off 

PT100 [25C] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

25C PT100 

Stp A 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

PT100 Trip Type [25D] 




25D PT100 TT 

Stp A Trip 

Off 

Motor I 2 t Trip Type [25B] 

Select the preferred way to react to a Motor I 2 t trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 

Same as menu [25B] 

25B Motor I 2 t TT 

Stp A Trip 

Default: 

Trip 

Trip 0 The motor will trip 

Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 





Modbus format 

Uint 

UInt 

PTC [25E] 




25E PTC 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 



Selection: 





Modbus format 

PTC Trip Type [25F] 

Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 



Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

25F PTC TT 

Stp A 

Trip 

UInt 

UInt 

External Trip [25G] 








UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Communication Error [25I] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

25I Com Error 

Stp A 

Off 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25G Ext Trip 

Stp A 

Off 

Communication Error Trip Type [25J] 

Select the preferred way to react to a communication 

trip. 

25J Com Error TT 

Stp A Trip 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

External Trip Type [25H] 

Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip. 

Default: Trip 

Selection: Same as menu [25B] 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 

25H Ext Trip TT 

Stp A Trip 

Trip 


Min Alarm [25K] 




25K Min Alarm 

Stp A 

Off 



Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Max Alarm Trip Type [25N] 

Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


Default: 

Selection: 

25N Max Alarm TT 

Stp A Trip 

Trip 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Min Alarm Trip Type [25L] 

Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Max Alarm [25M] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


25L Min Alarm TT 

Stp A Trip 

25M Max Alarm 

StpA 

Off 






Modbus format 

Over current F [25O] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Pump [25P] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

25O Over curr F 

Stp A 

Off 

25P Pump 

Stp A 

Off 


1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 

Over Speed [25Q] 




Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25Q Over speed 

Stp A 

Off 

External Motor Trip Type [25S] 


Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 






Modbus format 

25S Ext Mot TT 

Stp A Trip 

UInt 

UInt 

Liquid cooling low level [25T] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. 







Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 

25T LC Level 

Stp A 

Off 

External Motor Temperature [25R] 

Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears. 



Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Off 

1–3600 1–3600 1–3600 s 





Modbus format 

25R Ext Mot Temp 

Stp A 

Off 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 





Modbus format 

Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type [25U] 


Default: 

Selection: 

Trip 



Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 




25U LC Level TT 

Stp A Trip 

UInt 


Modbus format 

UInt 

Brake Fault [25V] 

Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip, activate 

auto reset and specify delay time. 

Default Off 

25V Brk Fault 

Stp A 

Off 

Off 0 Autoreset not activated. 

1 - 3600s 1 - 3600s Brake fault auto reset delay time. 

11.2.8 Serial Communication [260] 

This function is to define the communication parameters 

for serial communication. There are two types of 

options available for serial communication, RS232/ 

485 (Modbus/RTU) and fieldbus modules (Profibus, 

DeviceNet and Ethernet). For more information see 

chapter Serial communication and respective option 


Comm Type [261] 

Select RS232/485 [262] or Fieldbus [263]. 

 

261 Com Type 

Stp A RS232/485 

Default: 

RS232/485 0 

Fieldbus 1 

RS232/485 

RS232/485 selected 

Fieldbus selected (Profibus, DeviceNet or 

Modbus/TCP) 

NOTE: Toggling the setting in this menu will perform a 

soft reset (re-boot) of the Fieldbus module. 

RS232/485 [262] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232/485 

(Modbus/RTU) communication. 

262 RS232/485 

Stp 

Baud rate [2621] 

Set the baud rate for the communication. 

NOTE: This baud rate is only used for the isolated 

RS232/485 option. 

Default: 9600 

2400 0 

4800 1 

9600 2 

19200 3 

38400 4 

2621 Baudrate 

Stp 9600 

A 

Selected baud rate 

Address [2622] 

Enter the unit address for the VSD. 

NOTE: This address is only used for the isolated RS232/ 

485 option. 


Default: 1 

Selection: 1–247 

Fieldbus [263] 

Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus communication. 

Address [2631] 

Enter the unit address of the VSD. 

Default: 62 

Range: Profibus 0–126, DeviceNet 0–63 

Node address valid for Profibus and DeviceNet 

Process Data Mode [2632] 

Enter the mode of process data (cyclic data). For further 

information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Default: 

Basic 

None 0 Control/status information is not used. 

Basic 4 

Extended 8 

4 byte process data control/status information 

is used. 

4 byte process data (same as Basic setting) 

+ additional proprietary protocol for 

advanced users is used. 

Read/Write [2633] 

Select read/write to control the inverter over a fieldbus 

network. For further information, see the Fieldbus 

option manual. 

Default: 

RW 0 

Read 1 

2622 Address 

Stp 1 

A 

263 Fieldbus 

Stp A 

2631 Address 

Stp A 

62 

2632 PrData Mode 

StpA 

Basic 

2633 Read/Write 

Stp A 

RW 

RW 

Valid for process data. Select R (read only) for logging process 

without writing process data. Select RW in normal cases 

to control inverter. 

Additional Process Values [2634] 

Define the number of additional process values sent in 

cyclic messages. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-8 

Communication Fault [264] 

Main menu for communication fault/warning settings. 

For further details please see the Fieldbus option manual. 

Communication Fault Mode [2641]] 

Selects action if a communication fault is detected. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 No communication supervision. 

Trip 1 

Warning 2 


RS232/485 selected: 

The VSD will trip if there is no communication 

for time set in parameter [2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The VSD will trip if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

RS232/485 selected: 

The VSD will give a warning if there is no 

communication for time set in parameter 

[2642]. 

Fieldbus selected: 

The VSD will give a warning if: 

1. The internal communication between 

the control board and fieldbus option is 

lost for time set in parameter [2642]. 

2. If a serious network error has occurred. 

NOTE: Menu [214] and/or [215] must be set to COM to 

activate the communication fault function. 




Modbus format 

2634 AddPrValues 

Stp 0 

A 

2641 ComFlt Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 


Communication Fault Time [2642]] 

Defines the delay time for the trip/warning. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.5 s 


Ethernet [265] 

Settings for Ethernet module (Modbus/TCP). For further 

information, see the Fieldbus option manual. 

IP Address [2651] 

MAC Address [2652] 

Subnet Mask [2653] 

Gateway [2654] 

0.1-15 s 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

NOTE: The Ethernet module must be re-booted to 

activate the below settings. For example by toggling 

parameter [261]. Non-initialized settings indicated by 

flashing display text. 

Default: 0.0.0.0 

Default: 



2642 ComFlt Time 

Stp 0.5s 

A 

2651 IP Address 

000.000.000.000 

2652 MAC Address 

Stp 000000000000 

A 

An unique number for the Ethernet module. 

2653 Subnet Mask 

0.000.000.000 

2654 Gateway 

0.000.000.000 

DHCP [2655] 

Default: 

Selection: 

Off 

On/Off 

Fieldbus Signals [266] 

Defines modbus mapping for additional process values. 

For further information, see the Fieldbus option 


FB Signal 1 - 16 [2661]-[266G] 

Used to create a block of parameters which are read/ 

written via communication. 1 to 8 read + 1 to 8 write 

parameters possible. 

Default: 0 

Range: 0-65535 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 42801-42816 

Profibus slot/index 167/215-167/230 


UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

FB Status [269] 

Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters. 

Please see the Fieldbus manual for detailed information. 

11.3 Process and Application 

Parameters [300] 

These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain optimum 

process or machine performance. 

The read-out, references and actual values depends 

on selected process source, [321}: 

Table 20 

Selected process 

source 

2655 DHCP 

Stp A 

Unit for reference and 

actual value 

Off 

2661 FB Signal 1 

Stp 0 

A 

269 FB Status 

Stp 

Speed rpm 4 digits 

Resolution 


Table 20 

Selected process 

source 

Torque % 3 digits 

PT100 C 3 digits 

Frequency Hz 3 digits 

11.3.1 Set/View Reference Value 

[310] 

View reference value 

As default the menu [310] is in view operation. The 

value of the active reference signal is displayed. The 

value is displayed according to selected process 

source, [321] or the process unit selected in menu 

[322]. 

Set reference value 

If the function Reference Control [214] is set to: Ref 

Control = Keyboard, the reference value can be set in 

menu Set/View Reference [310] as a normal parameter 

or as a motor potentiometer with the + and - keys 

on the control panel depending on the selection of 

Keyboard Reference Mode in menu [369]. The ramp 

times used for setting the reference value with the 

Normal function selected in menu [369] are according 

to the set Acc Time [331] and Dec Time [332]. The 

ramp times used for setting the reference value with 

the MotPot function selected in [369] are according to 

the set Acc MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334]. 

Menu [310] displays on-line the actual reference value 

according to the Mode Settings in Table 20. 

Default: 

0 rpm 

Dependent on: 

Process Source [321] and Process Unit 

[322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 


Min according to menu [324] - max according 

to menu [325] 




Modbus format 

Unit for reference and 

actual value 

310 Set/View ref 

Stp 

0rpm 

Long 

EInt 

Resolution 

NOTE: The actual value in menu [310] is not copied, or 

loaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set 

[242], Copy to CP [244] or Load from CP [245] is 

performed. 

NOTE: If the MotPot function is used, the reference value 

ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot [333] and 

Dec MotPot [334] settings. Actual speed ramp will be 

limited according to Acc Time [331] and Dec Time [332]. 

NOTE: Write access to this parameter is only allowed 

when menu“Ref Control [214] is set to Keyboard. When 

Reference control is used, see section 10.5 Reference 

signal. 

11.3.2 Process Settings [320] 

With these functions, the VSD can be set up to fit the 

application. The menus [110], [120], [310], [362]-[368] 

and [711] use the process unit selected in [321] and 

[322] for the application, e.g. rpm, bar or m3/h. This 

makes it possible to easily set up the VSD for the 

required process requirements, as well as for copying 

the range of a feedback sensor to set up the Process 

Value Minimum and Maximum in order to establish 

accurate actual process information. 

Process Source [321] 

Select the signal source for the process value that 

controls the motor. The Process Source can be set to 

act as a function of the process signal on AnIn F(AnIn), 

a function of the motor speed F(Speed), a function of 

the shaft torque F(Torque) or as a function of a process 

value from serial communication F(Bus). The right 

function to select depends on the characteristics and 

behaviour of the process. If the selection Speed, 

Torque or Frequency is set, the VSD will use speed, 

torque or frequency as reference value. 

Example 

An axial fan is speed-controlled and there is no feedback 

signal available. The process needs to be controlled 

within fixed process values in “m 3 /hr” and a 

process read-out of the air flow is needed. The characteristic 

of this fan is that the air flow is linearly related 

to the actual speed. So by selecting F(Speed) as the 

Process Source, the process can easily be controlled. 

The selection F(xx) indicates that a process unit and 

scaling is needed, set in menus [322]-[328]. This 

makes it possible to e.g. use pressure sensors to 

measure flow etc. If F(AnIn) is selected, the source is 

automatically connected to the AnIn which has Process 

Value as selected. 


Default: 

Speed 

F(AnIn) 0 

Function of analogue input. E.g. via PID 

control, [330]. 

Speed 1 Speed as process reference 1 . 

PT100 3 Temperature as process reference. 

F(Speed) 4 Function of speed 

F(Bus) 6 Function of communication reference 

Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference 1 . 

1 . Only when Drive mode [213] is set to Speed or V/ 

Hz. 

NOTE: When PT100 is selected, use PT100 channel 1 on 

the PTC/PT100 option board. 

NOTE: If Speed, Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 

[321] Proc Source, menus [322] - [328] are hidden. 

NOTE: The motor control method depends on the 

selection of drive mode [213], regardless of selected 

process source, [321]. 

NOTE: If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321]see section 

10.5.1 Process value. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Process Unit [322] 

321 Proc Source 

StpA 

Speed 

322 Proc Unit 

Stp A 

rpm 

Default: rpm 

Off 0 No unit selection 

% 1 Percent 

°C 2 Degrees Centigrade 

°F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit 

bar 4 bar 

Pa 5 Pascal 

Nm 6 Torque 

Hz 7 Frequency 

rpm 8 Revolutions per minute 

m 3 /h 9 Cubic meters per hour 

gal/h 10 Gallons per hour 

ft 3 /h 11 Cubic feet per hour 

User 12 User defined unit 





Modbus format 

UInt 

User-defined Unit [323] 

This menu is only displayed if User is selected in menu 

[322]. The function enables the user to define a unit 

with six symbols. Use the Prev and Next key to move 

the cursor to required position. Then use the + and - 

keys to scroll down the character list. Confirm the 

character by moving the cursor to the next position by 

pressing the Next key. 

Character 

No. for serial 

comm. 

Character 

UInt 

Space 0 m 58 

0–9 1–10 n 59 

A 11 ñ 60 

B 12 o 61 

C 13 ó 62 

D 14 ô 63 

E 15 p 64 

F 16 q 65 

G 17 r 66 

H 18 s 67 

I 19 t 68 

J 20 u 69 

K 21 ü 70 

L 22 v 71 

M 23 w 72 

N 24 x 73 

O 25 y 74 

P 26 z 75 

Q 27 å 76 

R 28 ä 77 

S 29 ö 78 

T 30 ! 79 

U 31 ¨ 80 


comm. 


Character 

Ü 32 # 81 

V 33 $ 82 

W 34 % 83 

X 35 & 84 

Y 36 · 85 

Z 37 ( 86 

Å 38 ) 87 

Ä 39 * 88 

Ö 40 + 89 

a 41 , 90 

á 42 - 91 

b 43 . 92 

c 44 / 93 

d 45 : 94 

e 46 ; 95 

é 47 < 96 

ê 48 = 97 

ë 49 > 98 

f 50 ? 99 

g 51 @ 100 

h 52 ^ 101 

i 53 _ 102 

í 54 103 

j 55 

k 56 

l 57 


comm. 

Example: 

Create a user unit named kPa. 

1. When in the menu [323] press Next to move the 

cursor to the right most position. 

2. Press the + key until the character k is displayed. 

3. Press Next. 

4. Then press the + key until P is displayed and confirm 

with Next. 

5. Repeat until you have entered kPa. 

2 

3 

Character 

323 User Unit 

Stp A 


comm. 

104 

105 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 

Profibus slot/index 


Modbus format 

When sending a unit name you send one character at 

a time starting at the right most position. 

Process Min [324] 

This function sets the minimum process value allowed. 

Default: 0 

Range: 


Process Max [325] 

This menu is not visible when speed, torque or frequency 

is selected. The function sets the value of the 

maximum process value allowed. 


43304 

43305 

43306 

43307 

43308 

43309 

169/208 

169/209 

169/210 

169/211 

169/212 

169/213 

UInt 

UInt 

0.000-10000 (Speed, Torque, F(Speed), 

F(Torque)) 

-10000– +10000 (F(AnIn, PT100, F(Bus)) 




Modbus format 

EInt 

Default: 0 

Range: 0.000-10000 

324 Process Min 

Stp 0 

A 

325 Process Max 

Stp 0 

A 

Default: 

No characters shown 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Ratio [326] 

This menu is not visible when speed, frequency or 

torque is selected. The function sets the ratio between 

the actual process value and the motor speed so that 

it has an accurate process value when no feedback 

signal is used. See Fig. 51. 

Default: Linear 

Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed/torque 

Quadratic 1 


Fig. 51 Ratio 

326 Ratio 

Stp A 

Linear 

Process is quadratic related to speed/ 

torque 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Process 

unit 

Process 

Max 

[325] 

Process 

Min 

[324] Min 

Speed 

[341] 

Ratio=Linear 

Ratio=Quadratic 

Speed 

Max 

Speed 

[343] 

F(Value), Process Min [327] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It 

offers you the possibility of increasing the process 

accuracy by scaling the process values. The process 

values are scaled by linking them to known data in the 

VSD. With F(Value), Proc Min [327] the precise value at 

which the entered Process Min [324] is valid can be 

entered. 


[321] Proc Source, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

Default: 

Min -1 

Min 


327 F(Val) PrMin 

StpA 

Min 

According to Min Speed setting in 

[341]. 

According to Max Speed setting in 

Max -2 

[343]. 

0.000-10000 0-10000 0.000-10000 




Long, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

EInt 

F(Value), Process Max [328] 

This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used. It 

offers you the possibility of increasing the process 

accuracy by scaling the process values. The process 

values are scaled by linking them to known data in the 

VSD. With F(Value), Proc Max the precise value at 

which the entered Process Max [525] is valid can be 

entered. 


[321] Proc Source, menus [322]- [328] are hidden. 

328 F(Val) PrMax 

StpA 

Max 

Default: 

Max 

Min -1 Min 

Max -2 Max 

0.000- 

10000 

0-10000 0.000-10000 






Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 rpm 

EInt 

Example 

A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles. The 

required bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 

bottles/s. Process characteristics: 

10 bottles/s = 150 rpm 

100 bottles/s = 1500 rpm 

The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed 

of the conveyor belt. 

Set-up: 

Process Min [324] = 10 

Process Max [325] = 100 

Ratio [326] = linear 

F(Value), ProcMin [327] = 150 

F(Value), ProcMax [328] = 1500 

With this set-up, the process data is scaled and linked 

to known values which results in an accurate control. 

11.3.3 Start/Stop settings [330] 

Submenu with all the functions for acceleration, deceleration, 

starting, stopping, etc. 

Acceleration Time [331] 

The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for 

the motor to accelerate from 0 rpm to nominal motor 

speed. 

NOTE: If the Acc Time is too short, the motor is 

accelerated according to the Torque Limit. The actual 

Acceleration Time may then be longer than the value 

set. 

Default: 

Range: 


331 Acc Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

10.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 

F(Value) 

PrMax 1500 

[328] 




Long, 1=0.01 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

F(Value 

PrMin 

[327] 

150 

Linear 

Fig. 53 shows the relationship between nominal motor 

speed/max speed and the acceleration time. The 

same is valid for the deceleration time. 

rpm 

Bottles/s 

10 

Process Min [324] 

100 

Process Max [325] 

Nominal 

Speed 

100% n MOT 

Fig. 52 

Max Speed 80% n MOT 

(06-F12) 

8s 

10s 

t 

Fig. 53 Acceleration time and maximum speed 

Fig. 54 shows the settings of the acceleration and 

deceleration times with respect to the nominal motor 

speed. 


pm 

333 Acc MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 

Nom. Speed 

Default: 

Range: 

16.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 


(NG_06-F11) 

Fig. 54 Acceleration and deceleration times 

Deceleration Time [332] 

The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for 

the motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to 

0 rpm. 

Default: 

Range: 

10.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 





Modbus format 

Acc Time [331] Dec Time [332] 

332 Dec Time 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

NOTE: If the Dec Time is too short and the generator 

energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor, the 

motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit. 

The actual deceleration time may be longer than the 

value set. 

Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[333] 

It is possible to control the speed of the VSD using the 

motor potentiometer function. This function controls 

the speed with separate up and down commands, 

over remote signals. The MotPot function has separate 

ramps settings which can be set in Acc MotPot 

[333] and Dec MotPot [334]. 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the acceleration 

time for the MotPot up command. The acceleration 

time is defined as the time it takes for the motor 

potentiometer value to increase from 0 rpm to nominal 

speed. 




Modbus format 

Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 

[334] 

If the MotPot function is selected, this is the deceleration 

time for the MotPot down command. The deceleration 

time is defined as the time it takes for the motor 

potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed 

to 0 rpm. 

Default: 

Range: 

16.0 s 

0.50–3600 s 


Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 




Modbus format 

334 Dec MotPot 

Stp 16.0s 

A 

EInt 

Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed 

[335] 

If minimum speed, [341]>0 rpm, is used in an application, 

the VSD uses separate ramp times below this 

level. With Acc>MinSpeed [335] and Dec

Default: 

Range: 


Fig. 55 

10.0 s 

0.50-3600 s 




Modbus format 

rpm 

Nom.Speed 

[225] 

Max speed 

[343] 

Min speed 

[341] 

EInt 

Deceleration Time from Minimum 

Speed [336] 

If a minimum speed is programmed, this parameter 

will be used to set the deceleration time from the minimum 

speed to 0 rpm at a stop command. The ramp 

time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to 

decelerate from the nominal motor speed to 0 rpm. 

Default: 

Range: 

[335] 

335 Acc>Min Spd 

Stp 10.0s 

A 

[331] [332] 

336 Dec

Deceleration Ramp Type [338] 

Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in a 

parameter set Fig. 57. 

Default: 

Linear 

Selection: Same as menu [337] 


338 Dec Rmp 

StpA 

Linear 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

S-curve 

Spinstart [33A] 

The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is 

already rotating by catching the motor at the actual 

speed and control it to the desired speed. If in an 

application, such as an exhausting fan, the motor 

shaft is already rotating due to external conditions, a 

smooth start of the application is required to prevent 

excessive wear. With the spinstart=on, the actual control 

of the motor is delayed due to detecting the actual 

speed and rotation direction, which depend on motor 

size, running conditions of the motor before the Spinstart, 

inertia of the application, etc. Depending on the 

motor electrical time constant and the size of the 

motor, it can take maximum a couple of minutes 

before the motor is caught. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

33A Spinstart 

Stp A 

Off 


Off 

No spinstart. If the motor is already running 

the VSD can trip or will start with high current. 

Spinstart will allow the start of a running 

motor without tripping or high inrush currents. 

Linear 

Fig. 57 Shape of deceleration ramp 

t 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Start Mode [339] 

Sets the way of starting the motor when a run command 

is given. 

Default: 

Fast 0 

Fast (fixed) 


339 Start Mode 

Stp A Fast 

The motor shaft flux increases gradually. 

The motor shaft starts rotating immediately 

once the Run command is given. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Stop Mode [33B] 

When the VSD is stopped, different methods to come 

to a standstill can be selected in order to optimize the 

stop and prevent unnecessary wear, like water hammer. 

Stop Mode sets the way of stopping the motor 

when a Stop command is given. 

Default: 

Decel 0 

Decel 


The motor decelerates to 0 rpm according 

to the set deceleration time. 

Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to 0 rpm. 




Modbus format 

33B Stop Mode 

StpA 

Decel 

UInt 

UInt 


11.3.4 Mechanical brake control 

The four brake-related menus [33C] to [33F] can be 

used to control mechanical brakes. 

Brake Release Time [33C] 

The Brake Release Time sets the time the VSD delays 

before ramping up to whatever final reference value is 

selected. During this time a predefined speed can be 

generated to hold the load where after the mechanical 

brake finally releases. This speed can be selected at 

Release Speed, [33D]. Immediate after the brake 

release time expiration the brake lift signal is set. The 

user can set a digital output or relay to the function 

Brake. This output or relay can control the mechanical 

brake. 

Default: 

Range: 

33C Brk Release 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

0.00 s 

0.00–3.00 s 





Modbus format 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Fig. 58 shows the relation between the Brake functions. 

• Brake Release Time [33C] 

• Start Speed [33D] 

• Brake Engage Time [33E] 

• Brake Wait Time [33F] 

The correct time setting depends on the maximum 

load and the properties of the mechanical brake. During 

the brake release time it is possible to apply extra 

holding torque by setting a start speed reference with 

the function start speed [33D]. 

n 

Brake release 

time [33C] 

Brake wait 

time [33F] 

Brake engage 

time [33E] 

Start 

Release Speed [33D] 

t 

Mechanical 

Brake 

Open 

Closed 

Brake Relay 

Output 

On 

Off 

Fig. 58 Brake Output functions 

NOTE: This function is designed to operate a mechanical 

brake via the digital outputs or relays (set to brake 

function) controlling a mechanical brake. 

Action must take place within 

these time intervals 

G06 16 

Release Speed [33D] 

The release speed only operates with the brake function: 

brake release [33C]. The release speed is the initial 

speed reference during the brake release time. 

33D Release Spd 

StpA 

0rpm 


Default: 

Range: 

Depend on: 

0 rpm 

- 4x Sync. Speed to 4x Sync. 


4xmotor sync speed, 1500 rpm for 1470 

rpm motor. 

Vector Brake [33G] 

Braking by increasing the internal electrical losses in 

the motor. 

33G Vector Brake 

Stp A 

Off 




Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Off 

Vector brake switched off. VSD brakes normal 

with voltage limit on the DC link. 

Maximum VSD current (I CL ) is available for 

braking. 

Brake Engage Time [33E] 

The brake engage time is the time the load is held to 

engage a mechanical brake. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–3.00 s 


33E Brk Engage 

Stp 0.00s 

A 




Long, 1=0.01 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 





Modbus format 

Brake Fault trip time [33H] 

Default: 1.00s 

Range 0.00 - 5.00s 

UInt 

UInt 

33H Brk Fault 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

Wait Before Brake Time [33F] 

The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open 

and to hold the load, either in order to be able to 

speed up immediately, or to stop and engage the 

brake. 

33F Brk Wait 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

Note! The Brake Fault trip time should be set to longer 

time than the Brake release time[33C]. 

The “Brake not engaged” warning is using the setting 

of parameter “Brake Engaged time [33E]”. 

Following Figure shows principle of brake operation for 

fault during run (left) and during stop (right) 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–30.0 s 





Modbus format 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 


Start 

release time 

33C 

release time 

33C 

Brake wait 

time 

33F 

Brake engage 

time 

33E 

Running 

Torque 

Speed>0 

Brake relay 

e acknowledge 

Brake Trip 

Brake warning 


Modbus format 

PID ref 

PID out 

PID fb 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Maximum Speed [343] 

Sets the maximum speed at 10 V/20 mA, unless a 

userdefined characteristic of the analogue input is 

programmed. The synchronous speed (Sync-spd) is 

determined by the parameter motor speed [225]. The 

maximum speed will operate as an absolute maximum 

limit. 

This parameter is used to prevent damage due to high 

speed. 

Min 

speed 

Fig. 60 

[342] 

(NG_50-PC-9_1) 

Default: 

Sync Speed 0 

343 Max Speed 

StpA 

Sync speed 

Sync Speed 

Synchronous speed, i.e. no load 

speed, at nominal frequency. 

1-24000rpm 1- 24000 Min Speed - 4 x Motor Sync Speed 





Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

UInt, 1=1 rpm 

NOTE: It is not possible to set the maximum speed lower 

than the minimum speed. 

Note: Maximum Speed [343] has priority over Min Speed 

[341], i.e. if [343] is set below [341] then the drive will 

run at [343] Max Speed with acceleration times given by 

[335] and [336] respectively. 

Skip Speed 1 Low [344] 

Within the Skip Speed range High to Low, the speed 

cannot be constant in order to avoid mechanical resonance 

in the VSD system. 

When Skip Speed Low Ref Speed Skip Speed 

High, then Output Speed=Skip Speed HI during 

deceleration and Output Speed=Skip Speed LO during 

acceleration. Fig. 61 shows the function of skip 

speed hi and low. 

Between Skip Speed HI and LO, the speed changes 

with the set acceleration and deceleration times. 

Skipspd1 LO sets the lower value for the 1st skip 

range. 

344 SkipSpd 1 Lo 

Stp A 0rpm 

Default: 

Range: 

0 rpm 

0 - 4 x Motor Sync Speed 






Int 

Modbus format 

Int 

n 

Default: 0 rpm 

Range: 0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 





Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Skip Speed HI 

Skip Speed LO 

Skip Speed 2 High [347] 

The same function as menu [345] for the 2nd skip 

range. 

347 SkipSpd 2 Hi 

StpA 

0rpm 

Default: 

Range: 

0 rpm 

0 – 4 x Motor Sync Speed 

Fig. 61 Skip Speed 

NOTE: The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped. 

Skip Speed 1 High [345] 

Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip 

range. 

Default: 

Range: 

(NG_06-F17) 

0 rpm 

0 – 4 x Sync Speed 


Speed Reference 

345 SkipSpd 1 Hi 

Stp A 0rpm 




Int 

Modbus format 

Int 

Skip Speed 2 Low [346] 

The same function as menu [344] for the 2nd skip 

range. 

346 SkipSpd 2 Lo 

StpA 

0rpm 





Int, 1=1 rpm 

Modbus format 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Jog Speed [348] 

The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital 

inputs. The digital input must be set to the Jog 

function [520]. The Jog command/function will automatically 

generate a run command as long as the Jog 

command/function is active. The rotation is determined 

by the polarity of the set Jog Speed. 

Example 

If Jog Speed = -10, this will give a Run Left command 

at 

10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands. Fig. 

62 shows the function of the Jog command/function. 

Default: 

Range: 

Dependent on: 

50 rpm 


348 Jog Speed 

StpA 

50rpm 

-4 x motor sync speed to +4 x motor sync 

speed 

Defined motor sync speed. Max = 400%, normally 

max=VSD I max /motor I nom x 100%. 





Modbus format 

Jog 

Freq 

Jog 

command 

f 

Int 

Int 

t 

IxR Compensation [352] 

This function compensates for the drop in voltage over 

different resistances such as (very) long motor cables, 

chokes and motor stator by increasing the output voltage 

at a constant frequency. IxR Compensation is 

most important at low frequencies and is used to 

obtain a higher starting torque. The maximum voltage 

increase is 25% of the nominal output voltage. See 

Fig. 63. 

Selecting “Automatic” will use the optimal value 

according to the internal model of motor. “User- 

Defined” can be selected when the start conditions of 

the application do not change and a high starting 

torque is always required. A fixed IxR Compensation 

value can be set in the menu [353]. 

t 

Fig. 62 Jog command 

(NG_06-F18) 

352 IxR Comp 

Stp A 

Off 

11.3.6 Torques [350] 

Menu with all parameters for torque settings. 

Maximum Torque [351] 

Sets the maximum torque. This Maximum Torque 

operates as an upper torque limit. A Speed Reference 

is always necessary to run the motor. 

T MOT 

Nm 

Default: 

P MOT 

wx60 

= ---------------------------------------- 

n MOT 

rpmx2 

Range: 0–400% 


351 Max Torque 

Stp 120% 

A 

120% calculated from the motor data 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

Automatic 1 Automatic compensation 

User Defined 2 User defined value in percent. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

U 

% 

100 

IxR Comp=25% 




Modbus format 

EInt 

25 

IxR Com=0% 

NOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximum 

depends on the motor current and VSD max current 

settings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is 

400%. 

f 

10 20 30 40 50 Hz 

Fig. 63 IxR Comp at Linear V/Hz curve 

NOTE: The power loss in the motor will increase by the 

square of the torque when operating above 100%. 400% 

torque will result in 1600% power loss, which will 

increase the motor temperature very quickly. 


IxR Comp_user [353] 

Only visible if User-Defined is selected in previous 

menu. 

% 

100 

U 

Default: 0.0% 

Range: 


Flux Optimization [354] 

Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption 

and the motor noise, at low or no load conditions. 

Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V/Hz 

ratio, depending on the actual load of the motor when 

the process is in a steady situation. Fig. 64 shows the 

area within which the Flux Optimization is active. 


0-25% x U NOM (0.1% of resolution) 




Modbus format 

353 IxR CompUsr 

Stp 0.0% 

A 

Long 

EInt 

NOTE: A too high level of IxR Compensation could cause 

motor saturation. This can cause a “Power Fault” trip. 

The effect of IxR Compensation is stronger with higher 

power motors. 

NOTE: The motor may be overheated at low speed. 

Therefore it is important that the Motor I 2 t Current [232] 

is set correctly. 

354 Flux optim 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Function disabled 

On 1 Function enabled 

Fig. 64 Flux Optimizing 

NOTE: Flux optimization works best at stable situations 

in slow changing processes. 

11.3.7 Preset References [360] 

Motor Potentiometer [361] 

Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer function. 

See the parameter DigIn1 [521] for the selection 

of the motor potentiometer function. 

Default: 

Volatile 0 

Non volatile 1 

Non Volatile 


Flux optimizing 

area 

f 

50 Hz 

361 Motor Pot 

StpA 

Non Volatie 

After a stop, trip or power down, the VSD 

will start always from zero speed (or minimum 

speed, if selected). 

Non Volatile. After a stop, trip or power 

down of the VSD, the reference value at 

the moment of the stop will be memorized. 

After a new start command the output 

speed will resume to this saved value. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 


n 

[367] Preset Ref 6, with default 1250 rpm 


The selection of the presets is as in Table 21. 

Table 21 

Preset 

Ctrl3 

Preset 

Ctrl2 

Preset 

Ctrl1 

Output Speed 

Motpot 

UP 

Motpot 

DOWN 

Fig. 65 MotPot function 

t 

t 

t 

0 0 0 Analogue reference 

0 0 1 1) Preset Ref 1 

0 1 1) 0 Preset Ref 2 

0 1 1 Preset Ref 3 

1 1) 0 0 Preset Ref 4 




Preset Ref 1 [362] to Preset Ref 7 

[368] 

Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs. 

Preset speeds are activated by the digital inputs. The 

digital inputs must be set to the function Pres. Ref 1, 

Pres. Ref 2 or Pres. Ref 4. 

Depending on the number of digital inputs used, up to 

7 preset speeds can be activated per parameter set. 

Using all the parameter sets, up to 28 preset speeds 

are possible. 

Default: Speed, 0 rpm 

Dependent on: Process Source [321] and Process Unit [322] 

Speed mode 0 - max speed [343] 

Torque mode 0 - max torque [351] 

Other modes 


362 Preset Ref 1 

Stp A 0rpm 

Min according to menu [324] - max according 

to menu [325] 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 43132–43138 

Profibus slot/index 169/36–169/42 


Long 

Modbus format 

EInt 

The same settings are valid for the menus: 





1) = selected if only one preset reference is active 

1 = active input 

0 = non active input 

NOTE: If only Preset Ctrl3 is active, then the Preset Ref 4 

can be selected. If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active, then 

the Preset Ref 2, 4 and 6 can be selected. 

Keyboard reference mode [369] 

This parameter sets how the reference value [310] is 

edited. 

Default: 

Normal 0 

MotPot 1 

MotPot 


The reference value is edited as a normal 

parameter (the new reference value is 

activated when Enter is pressed after the 

value has been changed). The Acc Time 

[331] and Dec Time [332] are used. 

The reference value is edited using the 

motor potentiometer function (the new 

reference value is activated directly when 

the key + or - is pressed). The Acc MotPot 

[333] and Dec MotPot [334] are used. 




Modbus format 

369 Key Ref Mode 

StpA 

MotPot 

UInt 

UInt 


+ 

NOTE: When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot, the 

reference value ramp times are according to the Acc 

MotPot [333] and Dec MotPot [334] settings. Actual 

speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time [331] 

and Dec Time [332]. 

11.3.8 PID Process Control [380] 

The PID controller is used to control an external process 

via a feedback signal. The reference value can be 

set via analogue input AnIn1, at the Control Panel 

[310] by using a Preset Reference, or via serial communication. 

The feedback signal (actual value) must 

be connected to an analogue input that is set to the 

function Process Value. 

Process PID Control [381] 

This function enables the PID controller and defines 

the response to a changed feedback signal. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 PID control deactivated. 

On 1 

Invert 2 


The speed increases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [382] to [385]. 

The speed decreases when the feedback 

value decreases. PID settings according to 

menus [382] to [385]. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

PID P Gain [383] 

Setting the P gain for the PID controller. 

Default: 1.0 

Range: 0.0–30.0 

381 PID Control 

Stp A 

Off 

383 PID P Gain 

Stp 1.0 

A 

Modbus format 

Process 

reference 

Process 

feedback 

Fig. 66 Closed loop PID control 

PID I Time [384] 

Setting the integration time for the PID controller. 

Default: 

Range: 

1.00 s 

0.01–300 s 


Process PID D Time [385] 

Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller. 


EInt 




Long, 1=0.01 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Default: 

Range: 

0.00 s 

0.00–30 s 




Modbus format 

- 

Process 

PID 

VSD 

384 PID I Time 

Stp 1.00s 

A 

385 PID D Time 

Stp 0.00s 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

M 

Process 

06-F95 






PID sleep functionality 

This function is controlled via a wait delay and a separate 

wake-up margin condition. With this function it is 

possible to put the VSD in “sleep mode” when the 

process value is at it’s set point and the motor is running 

at minimum speed for the length of the time set in 

[386]. By going into sleep mode, the by the application 

consumed energy is reduced to a minimum. When the 

process feedback value goes below the set margin on 

the process reference as set in [387], the VSD will 

wake up automatically and normal PID operation continues, 

see examples. 

PID sleep when less than minimum 

speed [386] 

If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum 

speed for given delay time, the VSD will go to sleep. 

Default: 

Range: 

Off 

Off, 0.01 –3600 s 





Modbus format 

PID Activation Margin [387] 

The PID activation (wake-up) margin is related to the 

process reference and sets the limit when the VSD 

should wake-up/start again. 


Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

NOTE: Menu [386] has higher priority than menu [342]. 

Default: 0 

Range: 

0 –10000 in Process unit 




Modbus format 

386 PID

PID Steady State Test [388] 

In application situations where the feedback can 

become independent of the motor speed, this PID 

Steady Test function can be used to overrule the PID 

operation and force the VSD to go in sleep mode i.e. 

the VSD automatically reduces the output speed while 

at the same time ensures the process value. 

Example: pressure controlled pump systems with low/ 

no flow operation and where the process pressure has 

become independent of the pump speed, e.g. due to 

slowly closed valves. By going into Sleep mode, heating 

of the pump and motor will be avoided and no 

energy is spilled. 

PID Steady state test delay. 

NOTE: It is important that the system has reached a 

stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated. 

Default: 

Range: 

Off 

Off, 0.01–3600 s 





Modbus format 

388 PID Stdy Tst 

StpA 

Off 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

During the steady state test the PID operation is overruled 

and the VSD is decreasing the speed as long as 

the PID error is within the steady state margin. If the 

PID error goes outside the steady state margin the test 

failed and normal PID operation continues, see example. 

Default: 0 

Range: 

0–10000 in process unit 





Modbus format 

389 PID Stdy Mar 

Stp 0 

A 

Long, 1=0.01 s 

EInt 

Example: The PID Steady Test starts when the process 

value [711] is within the margin and Steady State 

Test Wait Delay has expired. The PID output will 

decrease speed with a step value which corresponds 

to the margin as long as the Process value [711] stays 

within steady state margin. When Min Speed [341] is 

reached the steady state test was successful and 

stop/sleep is commanded if PID sleep function [386] 

and [387] is activated. If the Process value [711] goes 

outside the set steady state margins then the test 

failed and normal PID operation will continue, see Fig. 

69. 

PID Steady State Margin [389] 

PID steady state margin defines a margin band around 

the reference that defines “steady state operation”. 

[711] Process Value 

[310] Process Ref 

[389] 

[389] 

[387] 

[388] 

time 

[712] Speed 

Start steady 

state test 

Stop steady 

state test 

Normal PID 

Normal PID 

Steady state 

test 

Stop/Sleep 

[341] Min Speed [386] PID

11.3.9 Pump/Fan Control [390] 

The Pump Control functions are in menu [390]. The 

function is used to control a number of drives (pumps, 

fans, etc.) of which one is always driven by the VSD. 

Pump enable [391] 

This function will enable the pump control to set all relevant 

pump control functions. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 Pump control is switched off. 

On 1 


391 Pump enable 

Stp A 

Off 

Pump control is on: 

- Pump control parameters [392] to [39G] 

appear and are activated according to 


- View functions [39H] to [39M] are added 

in the menu structure. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Number of Drives [392] 

Sets the total number of drives which are used, including 

the Master VSD. The setting here depends on the 

parameter Select Drive [393]. After the number of 

drives is chosen it is important to set the relays for the 

pump control. If the digital inputs are also used for status 

feedback, these must be set for the pump control 

according to; Pump 1 OK– Pump6 OK in menu [520]. 

Default: 1 

1-3 Number of drives if I/O Board is not used. 

1-6 

1-7 


Number of drives if 'Alternating MASTER' is 

used, see Select Drive [393]. (I/O Board is 

used.) 

Number of drives if 'Fixed MASTER' is used, 

see Select Drive [393]. 

(I/O Board is used.) 

NOTE: Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or 

Master Pump. Used digital inputs must be defined as 

Pump Feedback. 




Modbus format 

392 No of Drives 

Stp A 

1 

UInt 

UInt 

Select Drive [393] 

Sets the main operation of the pump system. 

'Sequence' and 'Runtime' are Fixed MASTER operation. 

'All' means Alternating MASTER operation. 

393 Select Drive 

StpA 

Sequence 

Default: 

Sequence 0 

Sequence 

Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected in 

sequence, i.e. first pump 1 then pump 2 

etc. 

- A maximum of 7 drives can be used. 


Run Time 1 

All 2 


Fixed MASTER operation: 

- The additional drives will be selected 

depending on the Run Time. So the drive 

with the lowest Run Time will be selected 

first. The Run Time is monitored in menus 

[39H] to [39M] in sequence. For each drive 

the Run Time can be reset. 

- When drives are stopped, the drive with 

the longest Run Time will be stopped first. 

- Maximum 7 drives can be used. 

Alternating MASTER operation: 

- When the drive is powered up, one drive is 

selected as the Master drive. The selection 

criteria depends on the Change Condition 

[394]. The drive will be selected according 

to the Run Time. So the drive with the lowest 

Run Time will be selected first. The Run 

Time is monitored in menus [39H] to [39M] 

in sequence. For each drive the Run Time 

can be reset. 

- A maximum of 6 drives can be used. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives 

are selected. 

Timer 1 

Both 2 


The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The change will take place immediately. 

So during operation the additional 

pumps will be stopped temporarily, the 

'new' master will be selected according to 

the Run Time and the additional pumps will 

be started again. 

It is possible to leave 2 pumps running during 

the change operation. This can be set 

with Drives on Change [396]. 

The master drive will be changed if the 

timer setting in Change Timer [395] has 

elapsed. The 'new' master will be selected 

according to the elapsed Run Time. The 

change will only take place after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition. 

- Trip condition. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: If the Status feedback inputs (DigIn 9 to Digin 14) 

are used, the master drive will be changed immediately 

if the feedback generates an 'Error'. 

Change Condition [394] 

This parameter determines the criteria for changing 

the master. This menu only appears if Alternating 

MASTER operation is selected. The elapsed run time 

of each drive is monitored. The elapsed run time 

always determines which drive will be the 'new' master 

drive. 

This function is only active if the parameter Select 

Drive [393]=All. 

394 Change Cond 

Stp A Both 

Default: 

Stop 0 

Both 

The Runtime of the master drive determines 

when a master drive has to be 

changed. The change will only take place 

after a: 

- Power Up 

- Stop 

- Standby condition 

- Trip condition. 


Change Timer [395] 

When the time set here is elapsed, the master drive 

will be changed. This function is only active if Select 

Drive [393]=All and Change Cond [394]= Timer/ Both. 

395 Change Timer 

StpA 

50h 

Upper Band [397] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper 

band, an additional drive will be added after a delay 

time that is set in start delay [399]. 

397 Upper Band 

Stp 10% 

A 

Default: 

Range: 

50 h 

1-3000 h 

Default: 10% 

Range: 

0-100% of total min speed to max speed 





Modbus format 

UInt, 1=1 h 

UInt, 1=1 h 

Drives on Change [396] 

If a master drive is changed according to the timer 

function (Change Condition=Timer/Both [394]), it is 

possible to leave additional pumps running during the 

change operation. With this function the change operation 

will be as smooth as possible. The maximum 

number to be programmed in this menu depends on 

the number of additional drives. 

Example: 

If the number of drives is set to 6, the maximum value 

will be 4. This function is only active if Select Drive 

[393]=All. 

396 Drives on Ch 

Stp A 

0 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Example: 

Max Speed = 1500 rpm 

Min Speed = 300 rpm 

Upper Band = 10% 

Start delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed to Min Speed = 1500–300 = 

1200 rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 1500–120 = 1380 rpm 

Speed 

Max 

Upper band 

next pump starts 

Default: 0 

Range: 0 to (the number of drives - 2) 


Min 

Start Delay [399] 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-12_1) 


Fig. 70 Upper band 



UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Lower Band [398] 

If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower 

band an additional drive will be stopped after a delay 

time. This delay time is set in the parameter Stop 

Delay [39A]. 

Default: 10% 

398 Lower Band 

Stp A 

10% 


Range: 


Example: 



Lower Band = 10% 

Stop delay will be activated: 

Range = Max Speed - Min Speed = 1500–300 = 1200 

rpm 

10% of 1200 rpm = 120 rpm 

Start level = 300 + 120 = 420 rpm 

Fig. 71 Lower band 





Modbus format 

Speed 

Max 

Min 

“top” pump stops 

Stop Delay [39A] 

EInt 

Lower band 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-13_1) 


This delay time must have elapsed before the next 

pump is started. A delay time prevents the nervous 

switching of pumps. 


This delay time must have elapsed before the 'top' 

pump is stopped. A delay time prevents the nervous 

switching of pumps. 

Default: 

Range: 

0 s 

0-999 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Upper Band Limit [39B] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the upper band limit, 

the next pump is started immediately without delay. If 

a start delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range 

is between 0%, equalling max speed, and the set percentage 

for the UpperBand [397]. 

Default: 0% 

Range: 

0 to Upper Band level. 0% (=max speed) means 

that the Limit function is switched off. 





Modbus format 

39A Stop Delay 

Stp A 

0s 

39B Upp Band Lim 

Stp 0% 

A 

EInt 

399 Start Delay 

Stp A 

0s 

Default: 0 s 

Range: 0-999 s 


Speed 

Max 

Upper band 

next pump starts 

immediately 

Upper band 

limit [39B] 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Min 

Fig. 72 Upper band limit 


Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-14_2) 


Lower Band Limit [39C] 

If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit, 

the 'top' pump is stopped immediately without delay. 

If a stop delay is used this delay will be ignored. Range 

is from 0%, equalling min speed, to the set percentage 

for the Lower Band [398]. 

Default: 0% 

Range: 


Fig. 73 Lower band limit 

0 to Lower Band level. 0% (=min speed) means 

that he Limit function is switched off. 




Modbus format 

Speed 

Max 

Min 

39C Low Band Lim 

Stp A 

0% 

Lower band 

Settle Time Start [39D] 

The settle start allows the process to settle after a 

pump is switched on before the pump control continues. 

If an additional pump is started D.O.L. (Direct On 

Line) or Y/ , the flow or pressure can still fluctuate 

due to the 'rough' start/stop method. This could 

cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional 

pumps. 

During the Settle start: 

• PID controller is off. 

“top” pump stops 

immediately 


EInt 

(NG_50-PC-15_2) 

• The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a 

pump. 

39D Settle Start 

Stp A 

0s 

Lower band 

limit [39C] 

Flow/Pressure 

Default: 

Range: 

0 s 

0-999 s 





Modbus format 

Transition Speed Start [39E] 

The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow/ 

pressure overshoot when adding another pump. 

When an additional pump needs to be switched on, 

the master pump will slow down to the set transition 

speed start value, before the additional pump is 

started. The setting depends on the dynamics of both 

the master drive and the additional drives. 

The transition speed is best set by trial and error. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

Range: 


Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 





Modbus format 

39E TransS Start 

Stp 60% 

A 

EInt 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When an additional pump is needed, the speed will be 

controlled down to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm - 

200 rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When this 

speed is reached, the additional pump with the lowest 

run time hours will be switched on. 


Speed 

Actual 

Trans 

Min 

Switch on 

procedure starts 

Fig. 74 Transition speed start 

Additional pump 

Master pump 

Actual start 

command of next 

pump (RELAY) 

Flow/Pressure 

(NG_50-PC-16_1) 

Transition Speed Stop [39G] 

The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow/ 

pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional 

pump. The setting depends on the dynamics of both 

the master drive and the additional drives. 

In general: 

• If the additional pump has 'slow' start/stop dynamics, 

then a higher transition speed should be used. 

• If the additional pump has 'fast' start/stop dynamics, 

then a lower transition speed should be used. 

Default: 60% 

Range: 

39G TransS Stop 

Stp 60% 

A 


Flow/Pressure 

Transition speed 

decreases overshoot 




Fig. 75 Effect of transition speed 

Settle Time Stop [39F] 

The settle stop allows the process to settle after a 

pump is switched off before the pump control continues. 

If an additional pump is stopped D.O.L. (Direct 

On Line) or Y/ , the flow or pressure can still fluctuate 

due to the 'rough' start/stop method. This could 

cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional 

pumps. 

During the Settle stop: 

• PID controller is off. 

• the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a 

pump 

Default: 

Range: 

39F Settle Stop 

Stp A 

0s 

0 s 

0–999 s 


Time 


Modbus format 

Example 



TransS Start = 60% 

When less additional pumps are needed, the speed 

will be controlled up to min speed + (60% x (1500 rpm 

- 200 rpm)) = 200 rpm + 780 rpm = 980 rpm. When 

this speed is reached, the additional pump with the 

highest run time hours will be switched off. 

Speed 

Max 

Trans 

Actual 

Min 

Fig. 76 Transition speed stop 

Actual shut down of pump 

Master pump 

EInt 

Additional pump 

Flow/Pressure 

Switch off procedure starts 




Modbus format 

Long, 1=1 s 

EInt 


Run Times 1-6 [39H] to [39M] 

Unit: 

Range: 

h:m (hours:minutes) 

0h:0m–65535h:59m. 


Modbus Instance no/ 

DeviceNet no: 



Modbus format 

Reset Run Times 1-6 [39H1] to [39M1] 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 


Pump Status [39N] 

39N Pump 123456 

StpA 

OCD 

31051 hours, 31052 minutes, 





31066 hours, 31067 minutes 

121/195, 121/198, 121/201, 

121/204, 121/207, 121/210 

UInt 

UInt 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 38–43, pump 1 -6 



Modbus format 

Indication 

C 

D 

O 

E 

39H Run Time 1 

Stp A h:mm 

UInt 

UInt 

Description 

Control, master pump, only when alternating 

master is used 

Direct control 

Pump is off 

Pump error 

39H1 Rst Run Tm1 

Stp A 

No 

11.4 Load Monitor and Process 

Protection [400] 

11.4.1 Load Monitor [410] 

The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a 

load monitor. Load monitors are used to protect 

machines and processes against mechanical overload 

and underload, e.g. a conveyer belt or screw conveyer 

jamming, belt failure on a fan and a pump dry running. 

See explanation in section 7.5, page 40. 

Alarm Select [411] 

Selects the types of alarms that are active. 

Default: 

Off 

Off 0 No alarm functions active. 

Min 1 

Max 2 

Max+Min 3 


Alarm Trip [412] 

Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the VSD. 


Min Alarm active. The alarm output functions 

as an underload alarm. 

Max Alarm active. The alarm output functions 

as an overload alarm. 

Both Max and Min alarm are active. The 

alarm outputs function as overload and 

underload alarms. 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Off 

Selection: Same as in menu [411] 

UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

411 Alarm Select 

Stp A 

Off 

412 Alarm trip 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 


Ramp Alarm [413] 

This function inhibits the (pre) alarm signals during 

acceleration/deceleration of the motor to avoid false 

alarms. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Off 


(Pre) alarms are inhibited during acceleration/deceleration. 

(Pre) alarms active during acceleration/ 

deceleration. 




Modbus format 

413 Ramp Alarm 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

When the application has a constant load over the 

whole speed range, i.e. extruder or screw compressor, 

the load type can be set to basic. This type uses a single 

value as a reference for the nominal load. This 

value is used for the complete speed range of the 

VSD. The value can be set or automatically measured. 

See Autoset Alarm [41A] and Normal Load [41B] 

about setting the nominal load reference. 

The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 

9 load values at 8 equal speed intervals. This curve is 

populated by a test run with a real load. This can be 

used with any smooth load curve including constant 

load. 

Load 

Load curve 

Max Alarm 

Basic 

Min Alarm 

Alarm Start Delay [414] 

This parameter is used if, for example, you want to 

override an alarm during the start-up procedure. 

Sets the delay time after a run command, after which 

the alarm may be given. 

• If Ramp Alarm=On. The start delay begins after a 

RUN command. 

• If Ramp Alarm=Off. The start delay begins after the 

acceleration ramp. 

414 Start Delay 

Stp A 

2s 

Fig. 77 

Default: 

Basic 0 

Load 

Curve 

1 

415 Load Type 

Stp A Basic 

Basic 

Speed 

Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load 

level over the full speed range. Can be used 

in situations where the torque is independent 

of the speed. 

Uses the measured actual load characteristic 

of the process over the speed range. 

Default: 2 s 

Range: 0-3600 s 





Long, 1=1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Load Type [415] 

In this menu you select monitor type according to the 

load characteristic of your application. By selecting the 

required monitor type, the overload and underload 

alarm function can be optimized according to the load 

characteristic. 


Max Alarm [416] 

Max Alarm Margin [4161] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], 

menu that does not generate an alarm. With load type 

Load Curve, [415], used the Max Alarm Margin sets 

the band above the Load Curve, [41C], that does not 

generate an alarm. The Max Alarm Margin is a percentage 

of nominal motor torque. 

Default: 15% 

Range: 0–400% 





Modbus format 

Max Alarm delay [4162] 

Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of 

max alarm condition and after when the alarm is given. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 


Max Pre Alarm [417] 

EInt 




Modbus format 

4161 MaxAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

Max Pre AlarmMargin [4171] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm 

Margin sets the band above the Normal Load, [41B], 

menu that does not generate a pre-alarm. With load 

type Load Curve, [415], used the Max Pre-Alarm Margin 

sets the band above the Load Curve, [41C], that 

does not generate a pre-alarm. The Max Pre-Alarm 

Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque. 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0–400% 




Fieldbus format Long, 1=0.1% 

Modbus format 

Max Pre Alarm delay [4172] 


max pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is 

given. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0–90 s 


Min Pre Alarm [418] 

Min Pre Alarm Margin [4181] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm 

Margin sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], 

menu that does not generate a pre-alarm. With load 

type Load Curve, [415], used the Min Pre-Alarm Margin 

sets the band under the Load Curve, [41C], that 

does not generate a pre-alarm. The Min Pre-Alarm 

Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque. 


EInt 




Modbus format 

Default: 10% 

Range: 0-400% 

4171 MaxPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 

4172 MaxPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

Long, 1=0.1 s 

EInt 

4181 MinPreAlMar 

Stp 10% 

A 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Min Pre Alarm Response delay [4182] 


min pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is 

given. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 





Long, 1=0.1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Min Alarm [419] 

Min Alarm Margin [4191] 

With load type Basic, [415], used the Min Alarm Margin 

sets the band under the Normal Load, [41B], menu 

that does not generate an alarm. With load type Load 

Curve, [415], used the Min Alarm Margin sets the 

band under the Load Curve, [41C], that does not generate 

an alarm. The Max Alarm Margin is a percentage 

of nominal motor torque. 

Default: 15% 

Range: 0-400% 


4182 MinPreAlDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

4191 MinAlarmMar 

Stp 15% 

A 




Modbus format 

EInt 

Min Alarm Response delay [4192] 


min alarm condition and after when the alarm is given. 

Default: 

Range: 

0.1 s 

0-90 s 





Long, 1=0.1 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 

Autoset Alarm [41A] 

The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal 

load that is used as reference for the alarm levels. If 

the selected Load Type [415] is Basic it copies the 

load the motor is running with to the menu Normal 

Load [41B]. The motor must run on the speed that 

generates the load that needs to be recorded. If the 

selected Load Type [415] is Load Curve it performs a 

test-run and populates the Load Curve [41C] with the 

found load values. 

WARNING: When autoset does a test run the 

motor and application/machine will ramp up 

to maximum speed. 

NOTE: The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm 

function to succeed. A not running motor generates a 

“Failed!” message. 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 


4192 MinAlarmDel 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

41A AutoSet Alrm 

Stp A 

No 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 


The default set levels for the (pre)alarms are: 

Range: 

0–400% of max torque 

Overload 

Underload 

Max Alarm 

Max Pre Alarm 

menu [4161] + [41B] 

These default set levels can be manually changed in 

menus [416] to [419]. After execution the message 

“Autoset OK!” is displayed for 1s and the selection 

reverts to “No”. 

Normal Load [41B] 

Set the level of the normal load. The alarm or pre 

alarm will be activated when the load is above/under 

normal load ± margin. 

Default: 100% 

Range: 

menu [4171] + [41B] 

Min Pre Alarm menu [41B] - [4181] 

Min Alarm menu [41B] - [4191] 

41B Normal Load 

Stp 100% 

A 

0-400% of max torque 





Modbus format 

43336%, 43337 rpm, 

43338%, 43339 rpm, 

43340%, 43341 rpm, 

43342%, 43343 rpm, 

43344%, 43345 rpm, 

43346%, 43347 rpm, 

43348%, 43349 rpm, 

43350%, 43351 rpm, 

43352%, 43353 rpm 

169/240, 169/242, 

169/244, 169/246, 

169/248, 169/250, 

169/252, 169/254, 

170/1 

Long 

EInt 

NOTE: The speed values depend on the Min- and Max 

Speed values. they are read only and cannot be 

changed. 

NOTE: 100% Torque means: I NOM = I MOT . The maximum 

depends on the motor current and VSD max current 

settings, but the absolute maximum adjustment is 

400%. 

1 

Min Speed 

Min-Max alarm tolerance band graph 

Max Speed 





Modbus format 

EInt 

Load Curve [41C] 

The load curve function can be used with any smooth 

load curve. The curve can be populated with a testrun 

or the values can be entered or changed manually. 

Load Curve 1-9 [41C1]-[41C9] 

The measured load curve is based on 9 stored samples. 

The curve starts at minimum speed and ends at 

maximum speed, the range in between is divided into 

8 equal steps. The measured values of each sample 

are displayed in [41C1] to [41C9] and can be adapted 

manually. The value of the 1st sampled value on the 

load curve is displayed. 

0.5 

Fig. 78 

0 

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 

Speed 

Measured load samples 

Min-max tolerance band 

Max alarm limit 

Min alarm limit 

Default: 100% 

41C1 Load Curve1 

Stp 0rpm 100% 

A 


11.4.2 Process Protection [420] 

Submenu with settings regarding protection functions 

for the VSD and the motor. 

Low Voltage Override [421] 

If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage 

override function is enabled, the VSD will automatically 

decrease the motor speed to keep control of the 

application and prevent an under voltage trip until the 

input voltage rises again. Therefore the rotating energy 

in the motor/load is used to keep the DC link voltage 

level at the override level, for as long as possible or 

until the motor comes to a standstill. This is dependent 

on the inertia of the motor/load combination and 

the load of the motor at the time the dip occurs, see 

Fig. 79. 

Default: On 

Off 0 At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect. 

On 1 

At mains dip, VSD ramps down until voltage 

rises. 


421 Low Volt OR 

Stp A 

On 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

DC link voltage 

Override 

level 

Low Volt. 

level 

Rotor locked [422] 

With the rotor locked function enabled, the VSD will 

protect the motor and application when this is stalled 

whilst increasing the motor speed from standstill. This 

protection will coast the motor to stop and indicate a 

fault when the Torque Limit has been active at very low 

speed for more than 5 seconds. 

Default: Off 

Off 0 No detection 

On 1 


Motor lost [423] 

With the motor lost function enabled, the VSD is able 

to detect a fault in the motor circuit: motor, motor 

cable, thermal relay or output filter. Motor lost will 

cause a trip, and the motor will coast to standstill, 

when a missing motor phase is detected during a 

period of 5 s. 


VSD will trip when locked rotor is detected. 

Trip message “Locked Rotor”. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Default: 

Off 0 

Trip 1 

422 Rotor locked 

Stp A 

Off 

423 Motor lost 

Stp A 

Off 

Off 

Function switched off to be used if no 

motor or very small motor connected. 

VSD will trip when the motor is disconnected. 

Trip message “Motor Lost”. 

Speed 

t 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

(06-F60new) 

Fig. 79 Low voltage override 

t 

NOTE: During the low voltage override the LED trip/limit 

blinks. 


Overvolt control [424] 

Used to switch off the overvoltage control function 

when only braking by brake chopper and resistor is 

required. The overvoltage control function, limits the 

braking torque so that the DC link voltage level is controlled 

at a high, but safe, level. This is achieved by 

limiting the actual deceleration rate during stopping. In 

case of a defect at the brake chopper or the brake 

resistor the VSD will trip for “Overvoltage” to avoid a 

fall of the load e.g. in crane applications. 

NOTE: Overvoltage control should not be activated if 

brake chopper is used. 

424 Over Volt Ctl 

Stp A 

On 

Default: On 

On 0 Overvoltage control activated 

Off 1 Overvoltage control off 

Process Val 3 

Process Ref 4 


The input value equals the actual process 

value (feedback) and is compared to the 

reference signal (set point) by the PID controller, 

or can be used to display and view 

the actual process value. 

Reference value is set for control in process 

units, see Process Source [321] and 

Process Unit [322]. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

NOTE: When AnInX Func=Off, the connected signal will 

still be available for Comparators [610]. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.5 I/Os and Virtual 

Connections [500] 

Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs 

and outputs of the VSD. 

11.5.1 Analogue Inputs [510] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs. 

AnIn1 Function [511] 

Sets the function for Analogue input 1. Scale and 

range are defined by AnIn1 Advanced settings [513]. 

511 AnIn1 Fc 

Stp A Process Ref 

Default: Process Ref 

Off 0 Input is not active 

Max Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit. 

Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit. 


Adding analogue inputs 

If more then one analogue input is set to the same 

function, the values of the inputs can be added 

together. In the following examples we assume that 

Process Source [321] is set to Speed. 

Example 1: Add signals with different weight (fine tuning). 

Signal on AnIn1 = 10 mA 

Signal on AnIn2 = 5 mA 

[511] AnIn1 Function = Process Ref. 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = Min (0 rpm) 

[5136] AnIn1 Function Max = Max (1500 rpm) 

[5138] AnIn1 Operation = Add+ 


[515] AnIn2 Setup = 4-20 mA 


[5166] AnIn2 Function Max = User defined 

[5167] AnIn2 Value Max = 300 rpm 


Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (10-4) / (20-4) x (1500-0) + 0 = 562.5 rpm 

AnIn2 = (5-4) / (20-4) x (300-0) + 0 = 18.75 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+562.5 + 18.75 = 581 rpm 

Analogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs: 

When two different external Reference signals are 

used, e.g. 4-20mA signal from control centre and a 0- 

10 V locally mounted potentiometer, it is possible to 

switch between these two different analogue input signals 

via a Digital Input set to “AnIn Select”. 

AnIn1 is 4-20 mA 

AnIn2 is 0-10 V 

DigIn3 is controlling the AnIn selection; HIGH is 4-20 

mA, LOW is 0-10 V 

[511] AnIn1 Fc = Process Ref; 

set AnIn1 as reference signal input 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = 4-20mA; 

set AnIn1 for a current reference signal 

[513A] AnIn1 Enable = DigIn; 

set AnIn1 to be active when DigIn3 is HIGH 

[514] AnIn2 Fc = Process Ref; 

set AnIn2 as reference signal input 

[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10V; 

set AnIn2 for a voltage reference signal 

[516A] AnIn2 Enabl = !DigIn; 

set AnIn2 to be active when DigIn3 is LOW 

[523] DigIn3=AnIn; 

set DIgIn3 as input fot selection of AI reference 

Subtracting analogue inputs 

Example 2: Subtract two signals 

Signal on AnIn1 = 8 V 

Signal on AnIn2 = 4 V 


[512] AnIn1 Setup = 0-10 V 





[515] AnIn2 Setup = 0-10 V 



[5168] AnIn2 Operation = Sub- 

Calculation: 

AnIn1 = (8-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 1200 rpm 

AnIn2 = (4-0) / (10-0) x (1500-0) + 0 = 600 rpm 

The actual process reference will be: 

+1200 - 600 = 600 rpm 

AnIn1 Setup [512] 

The analogue input setup is used to configure the analogue 

input in accordance with the signal used that will 

be connected to the analogue input. With this selection 

the input can be determined as current (4-20 mA) 

or voltage 

(0-10 V) controlled input. Other selections are available 

for using a threshold (live zero), a bipolar input function, 

or a user defined input range. With a bipolar input 

reference signal, it is possible to control the motor in 

two directions. See Fig. 80. 

NOTE: The selection of voltage or current input is done 

with S1. When the switch is in voltage mode only the 

voltage menu items are selectable. With the switch in 

current mode only the current menu items are 

selectable. 

Default: 

Dependent on 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

512 AnIn1 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

4-20 mA 

Setting of switch S1 

The current input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the input signal. See Fig. 82. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 81. 

The scale of the current controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input signal. 

Can be defined by the advanced AnIn 

Min and AnIn Max menus. 


User Bipol 

mA 

3 

0–10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol 

V 

7 

Sets the input for a bipolar current input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the input that controls the full range for the 

input signal. See Fig. 81. 

The voltage input has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full range 

for the input signal. See Fig. 82. 

The scale of the voltage controlled input, 

that controls the full range for the input signal. 

Can be defined by the advanced AnIn 

Min and AnIn Max menus. 

Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input, 

where the scale controls the range for the 

input signal. Scale can be defined in 

advanced menu AnIn Bipol. 

100 % 

Fig. 81 Normal full-scale configuration 

100 % 

n 

Ref 

0 10 V 

20mA 

(NG_06-F21) 

n 

0–10 V 

0–20 mA 

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”. 

2–10 V 

4–20 mA 

NOTE: Always check the needed set up when the setting 

of S1 is changed; selection will not adapt automatically. 

0 

2 V 

4mA 

10 V 

2 0mA 

Ref 


Fig. 82 2–10 V/4–20 mA (Live Zero) 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

AnIn1 Advanced [513] 

NOTE: The different menus will automatically be set to 

either “mA” or “V”, based on the selection in AnIn 1 

Setup [512]. 

Speed 

100 % 

n 

513 AnIn1 Advan 

Stp A 

AnIn1 Min [5131] 

Parameter to set the minimum value of the external 

reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

-10 V 

0 

10 V 

20 mA 

5131 AnIn1 Min 

Stp A 0V/4.00mA 

100 % 

(NG_06-F21) 

Default: 

Range: 

0 V/4.00 mA 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 

Fig. 80 





Long 

Modbus format 

EInt 


AnIn1 Max [5132] 

Parameter to set the maximum value of the external 

reference signal. Only visible if [512] = User mA/V. 

Default: 10.00 V/20.00 mA 

Range: 


Special function: Inverted reference signal 

If the AnIn minimum value is higher than the AnIn maximum 

value, the input will act as an inverted reference 

input, see Fig. 83. 

Fig. 83 Inverted reference 

0.00–20.00 mA 

0–10.00 V 




Modbus format 

100 % 

n 

Long 

EInt 

AnIn1 Bipol [5133] 

This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is 

set to User Bipol mA or User Bipol V. The window will 

automatically show mA or V range according to 

selected function. The range is set by changing the 

positive maximum value; the negative value is automatically 

adapted accordingly. Only visible if [512] = 

User Bipol mA/V. The inputs RunR and RunL input 

need to be active, and Rotation, [219], must be set to 

“R+L”, to operate the bipolar function on the analogue 

input. 

Default: 

Range: 

5132 AnIn1 Max 

Stp 10.0V/20.00mA 

0 1 0 V 

0.00–10.00 V 

0.0–20.0 mA, 0.00–10.00 V 

Invert 

AnIn Min > 

AnIn Max 

Ref 

5133 AnIn1 Bipol 

Stp 10.00V 

A 

(NG_06-F25) 





Modbus format 

AnIn1 Function Min [5134] 

With AnIn1 Function Min the physical minimum value 

is scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling 

is dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. 

Default: 

Min 

Min 0 Min value 

Max 1 Max value 

Userdefined 

Table 22 shows corresponding values for the min and 

max selections depending on the function of the analogue 

input [511]. 

Table 22 


Long 

EInt 

2 Define user value in menu [5135] 

AnIn Function Min Max 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

AnIn1 Function Value Min [5135] 

With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user-defined 

value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is 

selected in menu [5134]. 

Default: 0.000 

5134 AnIn1 FcMin 

Stp A 

Min 

5135 AnIn1 VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 






Modbus format 

AnIn1 Function Max [5136] 

With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value 

is scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling 

is dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 [511]. 

See Table 22. 


Long, 

Speed 1=1 rpm 

Torque 1=1% 

Process val 1=0.001 

EInt 

Default: 

Max 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5137] 


DeviceNet no: 

43207 



Modbus format 

Long, 

Speed/Torque 1=1 rpm or %. 

Other 1= 0.001 

EInt 

AnIn1 Function Value Max [5137] 

With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user-defined 

value for the signal. Only visible when user-defined is 

selected in menu [5136]. 


5136 AnIn1 FcMax 

Stp A 

Max 

5137 AnIn1 VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Range: -10000.000 – 10000.000 

NOTE: With AnIn Min, AnIn Max, AnIn Function Min and 

AnIn Function Max settings, loss of feedback signals 

(e.g. voltage drop due to long sensor wiring) can be 

compensated to ensure an accurate process control. 

Example: 

Process sensor is a sensor with the following specification: 

Range:0–3 bar 

Output:2–10 mA 

Analogue input should be set up according to: 

[512] AnIn1 Setup = User mA 

[5131] AnIn1 Min = 2 mA 

[5132] AnIn1 Max = 10 mA 

[5134] AnIn1 Function Min = User-defined 

[5135] AnIn1 VaMin = 0.000 bar 

[5136] AnIn 1 Function Max = User-defined 

[5137] AnIn1 VaMax = 3.000 bar 

AnIn1 Operation [5138] 

Default: 

Add+ 0 

Sub- 1 

Add+ 


Analogue signal is added to selected function 

in menu [511]. 

Analogue signal is subtracted from 

selected function in menu [511]. 




Modbus format 

5138 AnIn1 Oper 

Stp A Add+ 

UInt 

UInt 

AnIn1 Filter [5139] 

If the input signal is unstable (e.g. fluctuation reference 

value), the filter can be used to stabilize the signal. A 

change of the input signal will reach 63% on AnIn1 

within the set AnIn1 Filter time. After 5 times the set 

time, AnIn1 will have reached 100% of the input 

change. See Fig. 84. 





Modbus format 

Long, 

Speed 1=1 rpm 

Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

Default: 

Range: 

5139 AnIn1 Filt 

Stp 0.1s 

A 

0.1 s 

0.001 – 10.0 s 






Long, 1=0.001 s 

Modbus format 

EInt 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

AnIn change 

100% 

63% 

Original input signal 

Filtered AnIn signal 


Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2. 

Same functions as AnIn1 Setup [512]. 


Stp A 4-20mA 

Default: 4 – 20 mA 

Dependent on Setting of switch S2 

Selection: Same as in menu [512]. 

Fig. 84 

AnIn1 Enable [513A] 

Parameter for enable/disable analogue input selection 

via digital inputs (DigIn set to function AnIn Select). 

Default: 

On 

On 0 AnIn1 is always active 

!DigIn 1 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is low. 

DigIn 2 AnIn1 is only active if the digital input is high. 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: AnIn1 43210 

Profibus slot/index AnIn1 169/114 


UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 



Same function as AnIn1 Func [511]. 

T 

5 X T 

513A AnIn1 Enabl 

Stp A 

On 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1 

Advanced [513]. 





Stp A 




43213–43220 

43542 

43552 

169/117–124 

170/191 

170/201 

514 AnIn2 Fc 

Stp A 

Off 

517 AnIn3 Fc 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 


Default: Off 







UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 



Default: 

Dependent on 

4–20 mA 







Modbus format 








Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 


Stp A 

43223–43230 

43543 

43553 

169/127–169/134 

170/192 

170/202 





Modbus format 

AnIn4 Set-up [51B] 


Default: 

Dependent on 

4-20 mA 



AnIn4 Advanced [51C] 




UInt 

UInt 





Modbus format 



51B AnIn4 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 

51C AnIn4 Advan 

Stp A 

43233–43240 

43544 

43554 

169/137–144 

170/193 

170/203 

AnIn4 Function [51A] 



51A AnIn4 Fc 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: 

Off 



11.5.2 Digital Inputs [520] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs. 

NOTE: Additional inputs will become available when the 

I/O option boards are connected. 

Digital Input 1 [521] 

To select the function of the digital input. 

On the standard control board there are eight digital 

inputs. 

If the same function is programmed for more than one 

input that function will be activated according to “OR” 

logic if nothing else is stated. 

Default: RunL 

Off 0 The input is not active. 

Ext. Trip 3 

Stop 4 

Enable 5 

RunR 6 

RunL 7 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the VSD will trip at “External 

trip” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Trip is active low. 

NOTE: Activated according to “AND” logic. 

Stop command according to the selected 

Stop mode in menu [33B]. 

NOTE: The Stop command is active low. 


Enable command. General start condition 

to run the VSD. If made low during running 

the output of the VSD is cut off immediately, 

causing the motor to coast to zero 

speed. 

NOTE: If none of the digital inputs are programmed 

to “Enable”, the internal enable 

signal is active. 


Run Right command. The output of the 

VSD will be a clockwise rotary field. 

Run Left command. The output of the VSD 

will be a counter-clockwise rotary field. 

Reset command. To reset a Trip condition 

Reset 9 

and to enable the Autoreset function. 

Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference. 



MotPot Up 13 

MotPot 

Down 

14 

521 DigIn 1 

Stp A 

RunL 

Increases the internal reference value 

according to the set AccMotPot time [333]. 

Has the same function as a “real” motor 

potentiometer, see Fig. 65. 

Decreases the internal reference value 

according to the set DecMotPot time [334]. 

See MotPot Up. 

Pump1 

Feedb 

Pump2 

Feedb 

Pump3 

Feedb 

Pump4 

Feedb 

Pump5 

Feedb 

Pump6 

Feedb 

Timer 1 

Timer 2 

Set Ctrl 1 

Set Ctrl 2 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

Mot PreMag 25 

Jog 26 

Ext Mot 

Temp 

Loc/Rem 

27 

28 

AnIn select 29 

LC Level 30 

Brk Ackn 31 


Feedback input pump1 for Pump/Fan control 

and informs about the status of the 

auxiliary connected pump/fan. 

Feedback input pump 2 for Pump/Fan control 















Timer 1 Delay [643] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Timer 2 Delay [653] will be activated on the 

rising edge of this signal. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

23 for selection possibilities. 

Activates other parameter set. See Table 

23 for selection possibilities. 

Pre-magnetises the motor. Used for faster 

motor start. 

To activate the Jog function. Gives a Run 

command with the set Jog speed and 

Direction, page 97. 

Be aware that if there is nothing connected 

to the input, the VSD will trip at “External 

Motor Temp” immediately. 

NOTE: The External Motor Temp is active 

low. 

Activate local mode defined in [2171] and 

[2172]. 

Activate/deactivate analogue inputs 

defined in [513A], [516A], [519A] and 

[51CA] 

Liquid cooling low level signal. 

NOTE: The Liquid Cooling Level is active 

low. 

Brake acknowledge input for Brake Fault 

control. Function is activated via this 

selection 

NOTE: For bipol function, input RunR and RunL needs to 

be active and Rotation, [219] must be set to “R+L”. 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Table 23 

Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 

A 0 0 

B 1 0 

C 0 1 

D 1 1 

NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu 

241 must be set to DigIn. 

Digital Input 2 [522] to Digital Input 8 

[528] 

Same function as DigIn 1 [521]. Default function for 

DigIn 8 is Reset. For DigIn 3 to 7 the default function is 

Off. 

Default: RunR 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Additional digital inputs [529] to [52H] 

Additional digital inputs with I/O option board installed, 

B1 DigIn 1 [529] - B3 DigIn 3 [52H]. B stands for board 

and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related 

to the position of the I/O option board on the option 

mounting plate. The functions and selections are the 

same as DigIn 1 [521]. 





Modbus format 

522 DigIn 2 

Stp A 

Int 

Int 

RunR 

11.5.3 Analogue Outputs [530] 

Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs. 

Selections can be made from application and VSD values, 

in order to visualize actual status. Analogue outputs 

can also be used as a mirror of the analogue 

input. Such a signal can be used as: 

• a reference signal for the next VSD in a Master/ 

Slave configuration (see Fig. 85). 

• a feedback acknowledgement of the received analogue 

reference value. 

AnOut1 Function [531] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1. Scale 

and range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings 

[533]. 

Default: 

Speed 

Process Val 0 

Actual process value according to Process 

feedback signal. 

Speed 1 Actual speed. 

Torque 2 Actual torque. 

Process Ref 3 Actual process reference value. 

Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power. 

Frequency 5 Actual frequency. 

Current 6 Actual current. 

El power 7 Actual electrical power. 

Output volt 8 Actual output voltage. 

DC-voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage. 

AnIn1 10 

AnIn2 11 

AnIn3 12 

AnIn4 13 

Speed Ref 14 

Torque Ref 15 

531 AnOut1 Fc 

Stp A Speed 

Mirror of received signal value on 

AnIn1. 


AnIn2. 


AnIn3. 


AnIn4. 

Actual internal speed reference Value 

after ramp and V/Hz. 

Actual torque reference value 

(=0 in V/Hz mode) 

NOTE: When selections AnIn1, AnIn2 …. AnIn4 is 

selected, the setup of the AnOut (menu [532] or [535]) 

has to be set to 0-10V or 0-20mA. When the AnOut Setup 

is set to e.g. 4-20mA, the mirroring is not working 

correct. 


Communication information AnOut 1 Setup [532] 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration. 

Default: 

4–20mA 0 

0–20mA 1 

User mA 2 

User Bipol 

mA 

3 

0-10V 4 

2–10V 5 

User V 6 

User Bipol V 7 

4-20mA 


532 AnOut1 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

The current output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 4 mA and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 82. 

Normal full current scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 81. 

The scale of the current controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 

signal. Can be defined by the advanced 

AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar current output, 

where the scale controls the range 

for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 

Normal full voltage scale configuration of 

the output that controls the full range for 

the output signal. See Fig. 81. 

The voltage output has a fixed threshold 

(Live Zero) of 2 V and controls the full 

range for the output signal. See Fig. 82. 

The scale of the voltage controlled output 

that controls the full range for the output 

signal. Can be defined by the advanced 

AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus. 

Sets the output for a bipolar voltage output, 

where the scale controls the range 

for the output signal. Scale can be 

defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol. 




Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Ref. 

VSD 1 

Master 

Ref. 

VSD 2 

Slave 

AnOut 

Fig. 85 


AnOut1 Advanced [533] 

With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu, the 

output can be completely defined according to the 

application needs. The menus will automatically be 

adapted to “mA” or “V”, according to the selection in 

AnOut1 Setup [532]. 

AnOut1 Min [5331] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA 

or User V is selected in menu AnOut 1 Setup [532]. 

The menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage 

setting according to the selected setup. Only visible 

if [532] = User mA/V. 

Default: 

Range: 

4 mA 


AnOut1 Max [5332] 

This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA 

or User V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup [532]. 

The menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage 

setting according to the selected setup. Only visible 

if [532] = User mA/V. 


0.00 – 20.00 mA, 0 – 10.00 V 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Range: 

20.00 mA 

EInt 

0.00–20.00 mA, 0–10.00 V 




Modbus format 

533 AnOut 1 Adv 

Stp A 

5331 AnOut 1 Min 

Stp A 

4mA 

5332 AnOut 1 Max 

Stp 20.0mA 

EInt 

AnOut1 Bipol [5333] 

Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol 

V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup. The menu will 

automatically show mA or V range according to the 

selected function. The range is set by changing the 

positive maximum value; the negative value is automatically 

adapted accordingly. Only visible if [512] = 

User Bipol mA/V. 

Default: 

Range: 


-10.00–10.00 V 

-10.00–10.00 V, -20.0–20.0 mA 




Modbus format 

EInt 

AnOut1 Function Min [5334] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value 

is scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling 

is dependent of the selected function of AnOut1 [531]. 

Default: 

Min 



User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5335] 

Table 24 shows corresponding values for the min and 

max selections depending on the function of the analogue 

output [531]. 

Table 24 

AnOut 

Function 

5333 AnOut1Bipol 

Stp -10.00-10.00V 

5334 AnOut1FCMin 

Stp A 

Min 

Min Value 

Max Value 

Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Speed Min Speed [341] Max Speed [343] 

Torque 0% Max Torque [351] 

Process Ref Process Min [324] Process Max [325] 

Shaft Power 0% Motor Power [223] 

Frequency 0 Hz Motor Frequency [222] 

Current 0 A Motor Current [224] 

El Power 0 W Motor Power [223] 

Output Voltage 0 V Motor Voltage [221] 


Table 24 

AnOut 

Function 

DC voltage 0 V 1000 V 

AnIn1 

AnIn2 

AnIn3 

AnIn4 

*) Fmin is dependent on the set value in menu Minimum 

Speed [341]. 


Example 

Set the AnOut function for Motorfrequency to 0Hz, set 

AnOut functionMin [5334] to “User-defined” and 

AnOut1 VaMin[5335] = 0.0. This results in an anlogue 

output signal from 0/4 mA to 20mA. ...... 

AnOut1 Function Value Min [5335] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a userdefined 

value for the signal. Only visible when userdefined 

is selected in menu [5334]. 


AnIn1 Function Min AnIn1 Function Max 







Modbus format 


Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




Modbus format 

Min Value 

5335 AnOut1VaMin 

Stp 0.000 

A 

Max Value 

Long, 

1=0.1 W, 0.1 Hz, 0.1 A, 

0.1 V or 0.001 

EInt 

Long, 

Speed 1=1 rpm 

Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

AnOut1 Function Max [5336] 

With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value 

is scaled to selected presentation. The default scaling 

is dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 

[531]. See Table 24. 

Default: Max 



User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337] 




Fieldbus format Long, 0.001 

Modbus format 

AnOut1 Function Value Max [5337] 

With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a userdefined 

value for the signal. Only visible when userdefined 

is selected in menu [5334]. 


EInt 

NOTE: It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted 

output signal by setting AnOut1 Min > AnOut1 Max. See 

Fig. 83. 


Range: -10000.000–10000.000 




Modbus format 

Long, 

Speed 1=1 rpm 

Torque 1=1% 


EInt 

AnOut2 Function [534] 

Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2. 

Default: 

Torque 

5336 AnOut1FCMax 

Stp A 

Max 

5337 AnOut1VaMax 

Stp 0.000 

A 

534 AnOut2 Fc 

Stp A Torque 







Modbus format 

AnOut2 Setup [535] 

Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration 

for analogue output 2. 

Default: 

4-20mA 


AnOut2 Advanced [536] 

Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 



UInt 

UInt 





Modbus format 



535 AnOut2 Setup 

Stp A 4-20mA 

UInt 

UInt 

536 AnOut2 Advan 

Stp A 

43263–43267 

43546 

43556 

169/167–169/171 

170/195 

170/205 

11.5.4 Digital Outputs [540] 

Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs. 

Digital Out 1 [541] 

Sets the function for the digital output 1. 

NOTE: The definitions described here are valid for the 

active output condition. 

Default: 

Off 0 

On 1 

Ready 

Output is not active and constantly 

low. 

Output is made constantly high, i.e. 

for checking circuits and trouble 

shooting. 

Run 2 

Running. The VSD output is active = 

produces current for the motor. 

Stop 3 The VSD output is not active. 

0Hz 4 

The output frequency=0±0.1Hz when 

in Run condition. 

Acc/Dec 5 

The speed is increasing or decreasing 

along the acc. ramp dec. ramp. 

At Process 6 The output = Reference. 

At Max spd 7 

The frequency is limited by the Maximum 

Speed. 

No Trip 8 No Trip condition active. 

Trip 9 A Trip condition is active. 

AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active. 

Limit 11 A Limit condition is active. 

Warning 12 A Warning condition is active. 

Ready 13 

T= T lim 14 

I>I nom 15 

Brake 16 

Sgnl

Max Alarm 20 

Max PreAlarm 21 

Min Alarm 22 

The max alarm level has been 

reached. 

The max pre alarm level has been 

reached. 

The min alarm level has been 

reached. 

Min PreAlarm 23 

The min pre alarm Level has been 

reached. 

LY 24 Logic output Y. 

!LY 25 Logic output Y inverted. 

LZ 26 Logic output Z. 

!LZ 27 Logic output Z inverted. 

CA 1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output. 

!A1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output. 

CA 2 30 Analogue comparator 2 output. 

!A2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output. 

CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output. 

!D1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output. 

CD 2 34 Digital comparator 2 output. 

!D2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output. 

Operation 36 

Run command is active or VSD running. 

The signal can be used to control 

the mains contactor if the VSD is 

equipped with Standby supply option. 

T1Q 37 Timer1 output 

!T1Q 38 Timer1 inverted output 

T2Q 39 Timer2 output 

!T2Q 40 Timer2 inverted output 

Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated 

Crane Deviat 42 Tripped on deviation 

PumpSlave1 43 Activate pump slave 1 






PumpMaster1 49 Activate pump master 1 






All Pumps 55 All pumps are running 

Only Master 56 Only the master is running 

Loc/Rem 57 Local/Rem function is active 

Standby 58 Standby supply option is active 

PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active 

PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active 

Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage 

Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode 

Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration 

Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc. ramp 

Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec. ramp 

I 2 t 66 I 2 t limit protection active 

V-Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active 

C-Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active 

Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning 

Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning 

DigIn 1 71 Digital input 1 








ManRst Trip 79 

Active trip that needs to be manually 

reset 

Com Error 80 Serial communication lost 

External Fan 81 

The VSD requires external cooling. 

Internal fans are active. 

LC Pump 82 Activate liquid cooling pump 

LC HE Fan 83 

Activate liquid cooling heat exchanger 

fan 

LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal active 

Run Right 85 


Positive speed (>0.5%), i.e. forward/ 

clockwise direction. 

Run Left 86 

Negative speed (0.5%), i.e. reverse 

counter clockwise direction. 

Com Active 87 Fieldbus communication active. 

Brk Fault 88 Tripped on brake fault (not released) 

BrkNotEngage 89 

Warning and continued operation 

(keep torque) due to Brake not 

engaged during stop. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 


Digital Out 2 [542] 

Relay 2 [552] 





Sets the function for the digital output 2. 

Sets the function for the relay output 2. 

542 DigOut2 

Stp A No Trip 

Default: No trip 


552 Relay 2 

Stp A 

Default: Run 


Run 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.5.5 Relays [550] 

Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs. 

The relay mode selection makes it possible to establish 

a “fail safe” relay operation by using the normal 

closed contact to function as the normal open contact. 

NOTE: Additional relays will become available when I/O 

option boards are connected. Maximum 3 boards with 3 

relays each. 

Relay 1 [551] 

Sets the function for the relay output 1. Same function 

as digital output 1 [541] can be selected. 

Default: 

Trip 






Modbus format 

551 Relay 1 

Stp A 

UInt 

UInt 

Trip 

Relay 3 [553] 

Sets the function for the relay output 3. 

553 Relay 3 

Stp A 

Default: Off 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Board Relay [554] to [55C] 

These additional relays are only visible if an I/O option 

board is fitted in slot 1, 2, or 3. The outputs are named 

B1 Relay 1–3, B2 Relay 1–3 and B3 Relay 1–3. B 

stands for board and 1–3 is the number of the board 

which is related to the position of the I/O option board 

on the option mounting plate. 

NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if any 

input/output is activated. 


Off 





Modbus format 

Relay Advanced [55D] 

This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay 

will also be closed when the VSD is malfunctioning or 

powered down. 

Example 

A process always requires a certain minimum flow. To 

control the required number of pumps by the relay 

mode NC, the e.g. the pumps can be controlled normally 

by the pump control, but are also activated 

when the variable speed drive is tripped or powered 

down. 

Relay 1 Mode [55D1] 

Default: 

N.O 0 

N.C 1 

N.O 


Relay Modes [55D2] to [55DC] 

Same function as for relay 1 mode [55D1]. 


UInt 

UInt 

The normal open contact of the relay will 

be activated when the function is active. 

The normally closed contact of the relay 

will act as a normal open contact. The 

contact will be opened when function is 

not active and closed when function is 

active. 




UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 




Modbus format 

55D Relay Adv 

Stp A 

55D1 Relay Mode 

Stp A 

N.O 

43277–43278, 

43521–43529 

169/181–169/182, 

170/170–170/178 

UInt 

UInt 

11.5.6 Virtual Connections [560] 

Functions to enable eight internal connections of comparator, 

timer and digital signals, without occupying 

physical digital in/outputs. Virtual connections are 

used to wireless connection of a digital output function 

to a digital input function. Available signals and control 

functions can be used to create your own specific 

functions. 

Example of start delay 

The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after DigIn1 

gets high. DigIn1 has a time delay of 10 s. 

Menu Parameter Setting 

[521] DigIn1 Timer 1 

[561] VIO 1 Dest RunR 

[562] VIO 1 Source T1Q 

[641] Timer1 Trig DigIn 1 

[642] Timer1 Mode Delay 

[643] Timer1 Delay 0:00:10 

NOTE: When a digital input and a virtual destination are 

set to the same function, this function will act as an OR 

logic function. 

Virtual Connection 1 Destination [561] 

With this function the destination of the virtual connection 

is established. When a function can be controlled 

by several sources, e.g. VC destination or Digital Input, 

the function will be controlled in conformity with “OR 

logic”. See DigIn for descriptions of the different selections. 

Default: 

Selection: 

Off 


Same selections as for Digital Input 1, 

menu [521]. 




Modbus format 

561 VIO 1 Dest 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 


Virtual Connection 1 Source [562] 

With this function the source of the virtual connection 

is defined. See DigOut 1 for description of the different 

selections. 

Default: 

Off 

Selection: Same as for menu [541]. 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

Virtual Connections 2-8 [563] to [56G] 

Same function as virtual connection 1 [561] and [562]. 

Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Destination. 




Modbus format 

43283, 43285, 43287, 

43289, 43291, 43293, 

43295 

169/ 187, 189, 191, 

193, 195, 197, 199 

UInt 

UInt 

Communication information for virtual connections 2-8 

Source. 




Modbus format 

562 VIO 1 Source 

Stp A 

Off 

43284, 43286, 43288, 

43290, 43292, 43294, 

43296 

169/ 188, 190, 192, 

194, 196, 198, 200 

UInt 

UInt 

11.6 Logical Functions and 

Timers [600] 

With the Comparators, Logic Functions and Timers, 

conditional signals can be programmed for control or 

signalling features. This gives you the ability to compare 

different signals and values in order to generate 

monitoring/controlling features. 

11.6.1 Comparators [610] 

The comparators available make it possible to monitor 

different internal signals and values, and visualize via 

digital output or a contact, when a specific value or 

status is reached or established. 

There are 2 analogue comparators that compare any 

available analogue value (including the analogue reference 

inputs) with two adjustable constants. 

For the two analogue comparators two different constants 

are available, Level HI and Level LO. With these 

two levels, it is possible to create a clear hysteresis for 

the analogue comparator between setting and resetting 

the comparator output. This function gives a clear 

difference in switching levels, which lets the process 

adapt until a certain action is started. With such a hysteresis, 

even an instable analogue signal can be monitored 

without getting a nervous comparator signal. 

Another function is to get a clear indication that a certain 

situation has occurred; the comparator can latch 

by set Level LO to a higher value than Level HI. 

There are 2 digital comparators that compare any 

available digital signal. 

The output signals of these comparators can be logically 

tied together to yield a logical output signal. 

All the output signals can be programmed to the digital 

or relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual 

connections [560]. 

Analogue Comparator 1 Value [611] 

Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Comparator 

1 (CA1). 

Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable analogue 

value in menu [611] with the constant Level HI in 

menu [612] and constant Level LO in menu [613]. 

When the value exceeds the upper limit level high, the 

output signal CA1 becomes high and !A1 low, see Fig. 

86. When the value then decreases below the lower 

limit, the output signal CA1 becomes low and !A1 

high. 

The output signal can be programmed as a virtual 

connection source and to the digital or relay outputs. 

Analogue value: 

Menu [611] 

Adjustable Level HI. 

Menu [612] 

Adjustable Level LO. 

Menu [613] 

Fig. 86 Analogue Comparator 

0 

1 

Signal:CA1 

611 CA1 Value 

Stp A Speed 

(NG_06-F125) 


Default: 

Speed 

Process Val 0 Set by Unit [310] 

Speed 1 rpm 

Torque 2 % 

Shaft Power 3 kW 

El Power 4 kW 

Current 5 A 

Output Volt 6 V 

Frequency 7 Hz 

DC Voltage 8 V 

Heatsink Tmp 9 °C 

PT100_1 10 °C 

PT100_2 11 °C 

PT100_3 12 °C 

Energy 13 kWh 

Run Time 14 h 

Mains Time 15 h 

AnIn1 16 % 

AnIn2 17 % 

AnIn3 18 % 

AnIn4 19 % 

Example 

Create automatic RUN/STOP signal via the analogue 

reference signal. Analogue current reference signal, 4- 

20 mA, is connected to Analogue Input 1. AnIn1 

Setup, menu [512] = 4-20 mA and the threshold is 4 

mA. Full scale (100%) input signal on AnIn 1 = 20 mA. 

When the reference signal on AnIn1 increases 80% of 

the threshold (4 mA x 0.8 = 3.2 mA), the VSD will be 

set in RUN mode. When the signal on AnIn1 goes 

below 60% of the threshold (4 mA x 0.6 = 2.4 mA) the 

VSD is set to STOP mode. The output of CA1 is used 

as a virtual connection source that controls the virtual 

connection destination RUN. 

Menu Function Setting 

511 AnIn1 Function Process reference 

512 AnIn1 Set-up 4-20 mA, threshold is 4 mA 

341 Min Speed 0 

343 Max Speed 1500 

611 CA1 Value AnIn1 

612 CA1 Level HI 16% (3.2mA/20mA x 100%) 

613 CA1 Level LO 12% (2.4mA/20mA x 100%) 

561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 

562 VIO 1 Source CA1 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 




20 mA 

Reference signal AnIn1 

Max speed 


UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

4 mA 

3.2 mA 

2.4 mA 

CA1 Level HI = 16% 

CA1 Level LO = 12% 

t 

CA1 

Mode 

RUN 

STOP 

T 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

Fig. 87 



No. 

1 

2 

3 

T 

4 

5 

6 

Analogue Comparator 1 Level High 

[612] 

Selects the analogue comparator constant high level 

according to the selected value in menu [611]. 

The default value is 300. 

Default: 

Range: 

Description 

The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

low, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 

below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is set 

high, mode=RUN. 

The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA, 

the motor speed will now follow the reference signal. 

During this period the motor speed will follow the reference 

signal. 

The reference signal reaches the threshold level, motor 

speed is 0 rpm, mode = RUN. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output stays 

high, mode =RUN. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 output=STOP. 

612 CA1 Level HI 

Stp A 300rpm 

300 rpm 

Enter a value for the high level. 




Modbus format 

Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 

via process value 

EInt 

Example 

This example describes the normal use of the constant 

level high and low. 

Menu Function Setting 

343 Max Speed 1500 

611 CA1 Value Speed 

612 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm 

613 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm 

561 VC1 Dest Timer 1 

562 VC1 Source CA1 

MAX 

speed 

[343] 

300 

200 

CA1 Level HI [612] 

Hysteresis 

CA1 Level LO [613] 

Mode Min Max Decimals 

Process 0 3 

Speed, rpm 0 Max speed 0 

Torque, % 0 Max torque 0 

Shaft Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0 

El Power, kW 0 Motor P n x4 0 

Current, A 0 Motor I n x4 1 

Output volt, V 0 1000 1 

Frequency, Hz 0 400 1 

DC voltage, V 0 1250 1 

Heatsink temp, C 0 100 1 

PT 100_1_2_3, C -100 300 1 

Energy, kWh 0 1000000 0 

Run time, h 0 65535 0 

Mains time, h 0 65535 0 

AnIn 1-4% 0 100 0 

Output 

CA1 

High 

Low 

Fig. 88 

No. 

1 

2 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

Description 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is 

set high. 

t 


No. 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 is reset, 

output is set low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays low. 


below (positive edge), the comparator CA1 output is 

set high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 does not 

change, output stays high. 


above (negative edge), the comparator CA1 is reset, 

output is set low. 

Analogue Comparator 1 Level Low 

[613] 

Selects the analogue comparator constant low level 

according to the selected value in menu [611]. 

For default value see selection table for menu [612]. 

Default: 

Range: 

200 rpm 


Enter a value for the low level. 




Modbus format 

Description 

613 CA1 Level LO 

Stp A 200rpm 

Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Analogue Comparator 2 Value [614] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value. 

Default: 

Torque 

Selections: Same as in menu [611] 





Modbus format 

Analogue Comparator 2 Level High 

[615] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level 

high. 

Default: 20% 

Range: 


UInt 

UInt 

Enter a value for the high level. 




Modbus format 

614 CA2 Value 

Stp A Torque 

615 CA2 Level HI 

Stp 20% 

A 

Long 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Analogue Comparator 2 Level Low 

[616] 

Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level 

low. 

Default: 10% 

616 CA2 Level LO 

Stp 10% 

A 

Range: 

Enter a value for the low level. 






Modbus format 

Digital Comparator 1 [617] 

Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 

(CD1). 

The output signal CD1 becomes high if the selected 

input signal is active. See Fig. 89. 

The output signal can be programmed to the digital or 

relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connections 

[560]. 

Digital signal: 

Menu [617] 

Fig. 89 Digital comparator 

Default: 

Run 


Long, 

1=1 W, 0.1 A, 0.1 V, 

0.1 Hz, 0.1C, 1 kWh, 

1H, 1%, 1 rpm or 0.001 


EInt 

Selection: Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541]. 




Modbus format 

Digital Comparator 2 [618] 

Function is identical to digital comparator 1. 

Default: DigIn 1 

+ 

- 

DComp 1 

617 CD1 

Stp A 

UInt 

UInt 

Signal: CD1 

(NG_06-F126) 

Run 

618 CD 2 

Stp DigIn 1 

A 

Selection: Same selections as for DigOut 1 [541]. 





Modbus format 

11.6.2 Logic Output Y [620] 

By means of an expression editor, the comparator signals 

can be logically combined into the Logic Y function. 

The expression editor has the following features: 

• The following signals can be used: 

CA1, CA2, CD1, CD2 or LZ (or LY) 

• The following signals can be inverted: 

!A1, !A2, !D1, !D2, or !LZ (or !LY) 

• The following logical operators are available: 

"+" : OR operator 

"&" : AND operator 

"^" : EXOR operator 

Expressions according to the following truth table can 

be made: 

Input 


relay outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source 

[560]. 


UInt 

UInt 

Result 

A B & (AND) + (OR) ^(EXOR) 

0 0 0 0 0 

0 1 0 1 1 

1 0 0 1 1 

1 1 1 1 0 

620 LOGIC Y 

Stp CA1&!A2&CD1 




Modbus format 

Long 

Text 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [621] to [625]. 


Example: 

Broken belt detection for Logic Y 

This example describes the programming for a socalled 

“broken belt detection” for fan applications. 

The comparator CA1 is set for frequency>10Hz. 

The comparator !A2 is set for load < 20%. 

The comparator CD1 is set for Run. 

The 3 comparators are all AND-ed, given the “broken 

belt detection”. 

In menus [621]-[625] expression entered for Logic Y is 

visible. 

Set menu [621] to CA1 

Set menu [622] to & 

Set menu [623] to !A2 

Set menu [624] to & 

Set menu [625] to CD1 

Menu [620] now holds the expression for Logic Y: 

CA1&!A2&CD1 

which is to be read as: 

(CA1&!A2)&CD1 

NOTE: Set menu [624] to "" to finish the expression 

when only two comparators are required for Logic Y. 

Y Comp 1 [621] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: 

CA1 0 

!A1 1 

CA2 2 

!A2 3 

CD1 4 

!D1 5 

CD2 6 

!D2 7 

LZ/LY 8 

!LZ/!LY 9 

T1 10 

!T1 11 

T2 12 

!T2 13 

621 Y Comp 1 

Stp A 

CA1 

CA1 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Y Operator 1 [622] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Y function. 

Default: 

& 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 





Modbus format 

Y Comp 2 [623] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function. 

Default: !A2 



UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

622 Y Operator 1 

Stp A 

& 

623 Y Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 

UInt 

UInt 


Y Operator 2 [624] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Y function. 

Default: 

. 0 

& 

& 1 &=AND 

+ 2 +=OR 

^ 3 ^=EXOR 


Y Comp 3 [625] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function. 


When · (dot) is selected, the Logic Y 

expression is finished (when only two 

expressions are tied together). 




Modbus format 

Default: 

CD1 


UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

624 Y Operator 2 

Stp A 

& 

625 Y Comp 3 

Stp A 

UInt 

UInt 

CD1 

11.6.3 Logic Output Z [630] 

630 LOGIC Z 

StpA 

CA1&!A2&CD1 

The expression must be programmed by means of the 

menus [631] to [635]. 

Z Comp 1 [631] 

Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

CA1 






Modbus format 

Z Operator 1 [632] 

Selects the first operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

& 



UInt 

UInt 




Modbus format 

631 Z Comp 1 

Stp A 

UInt 

UInt 

CA1 

632 Z Operator 1 

Stp A 

& 

Z Comp 2 [633] 

Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function. 

Default: !A2 

633 Z Comp 2 

Stp !A2 

A 







UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

11.6.4 Timer1 [640] 

The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or 

as an interval with separate On and Off times (alternate 

mode). In delay mode, the output signal T1Q becomes 

high if the set delay time is expired. See Fig. 90. 

Z Operator 2 [634] 

Selects the second operator for the logic Z function. 

Default: 

& 






Modbus format 

634 Z Operator 2 

Stp A 

& 

UInt 

UInt 

Z Comp 3 [635] 

Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function. 

Timer1 Trig 

T1Q 

Fig. 90 

Timer1 delay 

In alternate mode, the output signal T1Q will switch 

automatically from high to low etc. according to the 

set interval times. See Fig. 91. 


relay outputs used in logic functions [620] and [630], 

or as a virtual connection source [560]. 

NOTE: The actual timers are common for all parameter 

sets. If the actual set is changed, the timer functionality 

[641] to [645] will change according set settings but the 

timer value will stay unchanged. So initialization of the 

timer might differ for a set change compared to normal 

triggering of a timer. 

635 Z Comp 3 

StpA 

Default: CD1 


CD1 

Timer1 Trig 

T1Q 





UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 

Fig. 91 

T1 T2 T1 T2 

Timer 1 Trig [641] 

641 Timer1 Trig 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: 

Off 

Selection: Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu [541]. 





Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 


Timer 1 Mode [642] 

Default: 

Off 0 

Delay 1 

Alternate 2 

Off 





Modbus format 

Timer 1 Delay [643] 

This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to 

delay. 

This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2, see 

section 9.5, page 51. 

Timer 1 delay sets the time that will be used by the 

first timer after it is activated. Timer 1 can be activated 

by a high signal on a DigIn that is set to Timer 1 or via 

a virtual destination [560]. 

Default: 

0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

642 Timer1 Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

643 Timer1Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43433 hours 

43434 minutes 

43435 seconds 

170/82, 170/83, 

170/84 

UInt 

UInt 

Timer 1 T1 [644] 

When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is 

enabled, this timer will automatically keep on switching 

according to the independently programmable up and 

down times. The Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be 

enabled by a digital input or via a virtual connection. 

See Fig. 91. Timer 1 T1 sets the up time in the alternate 

mode. 

Default: 

0:00:00 (hr:min:sec) 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

Timer 1 T2 [645] 

Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode. 

Default: 

0:00:00, hr:min:sec 

Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

644 Timer 1 T1 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43436 hours 

43437 minutes 

43438 seconds 

170/85, 170/86, 

170/87 

UInt 

UInt 

645 Timer1 T2 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43439 hours 

43440 minutes 

43441 seconds 

170/88, 170/89, 

170/90 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: Timer 1 T1 [644] and Timer 2 T1 [654] are only 

visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate. 


Timer 1 Value [649] 

Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer. 

649 Timer1 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 


Modbus format 

Timer 2 Delay [653] 

UInt 

UInt 

Default: 


11.6.5 Timer2 [650] 

Refer to the descriptions for Timer1. 

Timer 2 Trig [651] 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 




Modbus format 

Default: 

Selection: 

Off 


Timer 2 Mode [652] 

42921 hours 

42922 minutes 

42923 seconds 

168/80, 168/81, 

168/82 

UInt 

UInt 

Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu 

[541]. 




Modbus format 

651 Timer2 Trig 

Stp A 

Off 

UInt 

UInt 

Default: 


Timer 2 T1 [654] 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 




Modbus format 

Default: 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

653 Timer2Delay 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43453 hours 

43454 minutes 

43455 seconds 

170/102, 170/103, 

170/104 

UInt 

UInt 


Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43456 hours 

43457 minutes 

43458 seconds 

170/105, 170/106, 

170/107 

UInt 

UInt 

652 Timer2 Mode 

Stp A 

Off 

Default: Off 






Timer 2 T2 [655] 

Default: 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 

Timer 2 Value [659] 

Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer. 

Default: 


Range: 0:00:00–9:59:59 





Modbus format 


Stp 0:00:00 

A 

43459 hours 

43460 minutes 

43461 seconds 

170/108, 170/109, 

170/110 

UInt 

UInt 

659 Timer2 Value 

Stp 0:00:00 

A 

42924 hours 

42925 minutes 

42926 seconds 

168/83, 168/84, 

168/84 

UInt 

UInt 

11.7 View Operation/Status 

[700] 

Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational 

data, such as speed, torque, power, etc. 

11.7.1 Operation [710] 

Process Value [711] 

The process value is a display function which can be 

programmed according to several quantities and units 

related to the reference value. 

Unit 

Resolution 


Speed [712] 

Displays the actual shaft speed. 


Depends on selected process source, 

[321]. 

Speed: 1 rpm, 4 digits 

Other units: 3 digits 




Modbus format 

EInt 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

rpm 

1 rpm, 4 digits 




Modbus format 

711 Process Val 

Stp 

712 Speed 

Stp 

rpm 

Int, 1=1 rpm 

Int, 1=1 rpm 


Torque [713] 

Displays the actual shaft torque. 

713 Torque 

Stp 0% 0.0Nm 

Current [716] 

Displays the actual output current. 

716 Current 

Stp 

A 

Unit: 

Nm 

Unit: 

A 

Resolution: 

1 Nm 

Resolution: 

0.1 A 



Shaft power [714] 

Displays the actual shaft power. 


Electrical Power [715] 

Displays the actual electrical output power. 


31003 Nm 

31004% 



Modbus format 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

W 

1W 

EInt 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 

Modbus format 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

kW 

1 W 

EInt 



Fieldbus format Long, 1=1W 

Modbus format 

714 Shaft Power 

Stp 

715 El Power 

Stp 

EInt 

W 

kW 





Modbus format 

Output Voltage [717] 

Displays the actual output voltage. 

Unit: 

Resolution: 


Frequency [718] 

Displays the actual output frequency. 


V 

1 V 

Long, 1=0.1 A 

EInt 




Modbus format 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

Hz 

0.1 Hz 

Long, 1=0.1 V 

EInt 




Modbus format 

717 Output Volt 

Stp 

718 Frequency 

Stp 

Long, 1=0.1 Hz 

EInt 

V 

Hz 


DC Link Voltage [719] 

Displays the actual DC link voltage. 

Unit: 

Resolution: 

719 DC Voltage 

Stp 

V 

1 V 

V 

11.7.2 Status [720] 

VSD Status [721] 

Indicates the overall status of the variable speed drive. 

721 VSD Status 

Stp 1/222/333/44 


Fig. 92 VSD status 




Modbus format 

Heatsink Temperature [71A] 

Displays the actual heatsink temperature. 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 

0.1°C 


PT100_1_2_3 Temp [71B] 

Displays the actual PT100 temperature. 


Long, 1=0.1 V 

EInt 




Modbus format 

Unit: °C 

Resolution: 1°C 

Long, 1=0.1C 

EInt 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31012, 31013, 31014 



Modbus format 

71A Heatsink Tmp 

Stp ?C 

71B PT100 1,2,3 

Stp ?C 

Long 

EInt 

Display 

position 

Status 

1 Parameter Set A,B,C,D 

222 

333 

Source of reference 

value 

Source of Run/ 

Stop/Reset command 

44 Limit functions 

Example: “A/Key/Rem/TL” 

This means: 

A:Parameter Set A is active. 

Value 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Rem (remote) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

-Key (keyboard) 

-Rem (remote) 

-Com (Serial comm.) 

-Opt (option) 

Key:Reference value comes from the keyboard (CP). 

Rem:Run/Stop commands come from terminals 1-22. 

TL: Torque Limit active. 

Warning [722] 

Display the actual or last warning condition. A warning 

occurs if the VSD is close to a trip condition but still in 

operation. During a warning condition the red trip LED 

will start to blink as long as the warning is active. 

722 Warnings 

Stp warn.msg 

-TL (Torque Limit) 

-SL (Speed Limit) 

-CL (Current Limit) 

-VL (Voltage Limit) 

- - - -No limit active 

The active warning message is displayed in menu 

[722]. 

If no warning is active the message “No Warning” is 

displayed. 


The following warnings are possible: 

Fieldbus 

integer 

value 

0 No Error 

1 Motor I²t 

2 PTC 

3 Motor lost 

4 Locked rotor 

5 Ext trip 

6 Mon MaxAlarm 

7 Mon MinAlarm 

8 Comm error 

9 PT100 

11 Pump 

12 Ext Mot Temp 

13 LC Level 

14 Brake 

15 Option 

16 Over temp 

17 Over curr F 

18 Over volt D 

19 Over volt G 

20 Over volt M 

21 Over speed 

22 Under voltage 

23 Power fault 

24 Desat 

25 DClink error 

26 Int error 

27 Ovolt m cut 

28 Over voltage 

29 Not used 

30 Not used 

31 Not used 


Warning message 




Modbus format 

Long 

UInt 

Digital Input Status [723] 

Indicates the status of the digital inputs. See Fig. 93. 

1DigIn 1 

2DigIn 2 

3DigIn 3 

4DigIn 4 

5DigIn 5 

6DigIn 6 

7DigIn 7 

8DigIn 8 

The positions one to eight (read from left to right) indicate 

the status of the associated input: 

1High 

0Low 

The example in Fig. 93 indicates that DigIn 1, 

DigIn 3 and DigIn 6 are active at this moment. 

723 DigIn Status 

Stp 1010 0100 

Fig. 93 Digital input status example 





Modbus format 

UInt, bit 0=DigIn1, bit 

8=DigIn8 

Digital Output Status [724] 

Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays. 

See Fig. 94. 

RE indicate the status of the relays on position: 

1Relay1 

2Relay2 

3Relay3 

DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position: 

1DigOut1 

2DigOut2 

The status of the associated output is shown. 

1High 

0Low 

See also the Chapter 12. page 157. 


The example in Fig. 94 indicates that DigOut1 is active 

and Digital Out 2 is not active. Relay 1 is active, relay 2 

and 3 are not active. 

724 DigOutStatus 

Stp RE 100 DO 10 

Fig. 94 Digital output status example 





Modbus format 

Analogue Input Status [725] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2. 

725 AnIn 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 95 Analogue input status 


UInt, bit 0=DigOut1, 

bit 1=DigOut2 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 

Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31019, 31020 

Profibus slot/index 121/163, 121/164 


Modbus format 

EInt 

The first row indicates the analogue inputs. 

1AnIn 1 

2AnIn 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second 

row the status of the belonging input is shown in %: 

-100%AnIn1 has a negative 100% input value 

65%AnIn2 has a 65% input value 

So the example in Fig. 95 indicates that both the Analogue 

inputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 

Analogue Input Status [726] 

Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4. 

726 AnIn 3 4 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 96 Analogue input status 





Modbus format 

Analogue Output Status [727] 

Indicates the status of the analogue outputs. Fig. 97. 

E.g. if 4-20 mA output is used, the value 20% equals 

to 4 mA. 

727 AnOut 1 2 

Stp -100% 65% 

Fig. 97 Analogue output status 


EInt 




Modbus format 

EInt 

The first row indicates the Analogue outputs. 

1AnOut 1 

2AnOut 2 

Reading downwards from the first row to the second 

row the status of the belonging output is shown in %: 

-100%AnOut1 has a negative 100% output value 

65%AnOut1 has a 65% output value 

The example in Fig. 97 indicates that both the Analogue 

outputs are active. 

NOTE: The shown percentages are absolute values 

based on the full range/scale of the in- our output; so 

related to either 0–10 V or 0–20 mA. 


I/O board Status [728] - [72A] 

Indicates the status for the additional I/O on option 

boards 1 (B1), 2 (B2) and 3 (B3). 

728 IO B1 

Stp RE000 DI10 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31025 - 31027 

Profibus slot/index 121/170 - 172 


Modbus format 

UInt, bit 0=DigIn1 

bit 1=DigIn2 

bit 2=DigIn3 

bit 8=Relay1 

bit 9=Relay2 

bit 10=Relay3 

11.7.3 Stored values [730] 

The shown values are the actual values built up over 

time. Values are stored at power down and updated 

again at power up. 

Run Time [731] 

Displays the total time that the VSD has been in the 

Run Mode. 

Reset Run Time [7311] 

Reset the run time counter. The stored information will 

be erased and a new registration period will start. 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 





Modbus format 

7311 Reset RunTm 

Stp 

No 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: After reset the setting automatically reverts to 

“No”. 

Mains time [732] 

Displays the total time that the VSD has been connected 

to the mains supply. This timer cannot be 

reset. 

731 Run Time 

Stp 

h:m:s 

732 Mains Time 

Stp 

h:m:s 

Unit: 

Range: 

h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds) 

0h: 0m: 0s–65535h: 59m: 59s 

Unit: 

Range: 

h: m: s (hours: minutes: seconds) 

0h: 0m: 0s–65535h: 59m: 59s 






Modbus format 

31028 hours 

31029 minutes 

31030 seconds 

121/172 

121/173 

121/174 

UInt, 1=1h/m/s 





Modbus format 

31031 hours 

31032 minutes 

31033 seconds 

121/175 

121/176 

121/177 



NOTE: At 65535 h: 59 m the counter stops. It will not 

revert to 0h: 0m. 


Energy [733] 

Displays the total energy consumption since the last 

energy reset [7331] took place. 

Unit: 

Range: 

kWh 

0.0–999999kWh 





Modbus format 

Reset Energy [7331] 

Resets the kWh counter. The stored information will be 

erased and a new registration period will start. 

Default: 

Selection: 

No 

No, Yes 



Long, 1=1 W 

EInt 



Modbus format 

733 Energy 

Stp 

UInt 

UInt 

kWh 

7331 Rst Energy 

Stp 

No 

NOTE: After reset the setting automatically goes back to 

“No”. 

11.8 View Trip Log [800] 

Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged 

trip data. In total the VSD saves the last 10 trips in the 

trip memory. The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO 

principle (First In, First Out). Every trip in the memory is 

logged on the time of the Run Time [731] counter. At 

every trip, the actual values of several parameter are 

stored and available for troubleshooting. 

11.8.1 Trip Message log [810] 

Display the cause of the trip and what time that it 

occurred. When a trip occurs the status menus are 

copied to the trip message log. There are nine trip 

message logs [810]–[890]. When the tenth trip occurs 

the oldest trip will disappear. 

Unit: 

Range: 

h: m (hours: minutes) 

0h: 0m–65355h: 59m 

For fieldbus integer value of trip message, see message 

table for warnings, [722]. 

NOTE: Bits 0–5 used for trip message value. Bits 6–15 

for internal use. 





Modbus format 

8x0 Trip message 

Stp h:mm:ss 

810 Ext Trip 

Stp 132:12:14 

UInt 

UInt 

Trip message [811]-[81N] 

The information from the status menus are copied to 

the trip message log when a trip occurs. 

Trip menu Copied from Description 

811 711 Process Value 

812 712 Speed 

813 712 Torque 

814 714 Shaft Power 

815 715 Electrical Power 

816 716 Current 

817 717 Output voltage 

818 718 Frequency 

819 719 DC Link voltage 

81A 71A Heatsink Temperature 

81B 71B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C 721 VSD Status 

81D 723 Digital input status 

81E 724 Digital output status 

81F 725 Analogue input status 1-2 

81G 726 Analogue input status 3-4 

81H 727 Analogue output status 1-2 


Trip menu Copied from Description 

81I 728 I/O status option board 1 

81J 729 I/O status option board 2 

81K 72A I/O status option board 3 

81L 731 Run Time 

81M 732 Mains Time 

81N 733 Energy 

81O 310 Process reference 


Modbus Instance no/DeviceNet no: 31102 - 31135 



Modbus format 

Example: 

Fig. 98 shows the third trip memory menu [830]: Over 

temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13 

minutes in Run time. 

Fig. 98 Trip 3 

121/246 - 254, 

122/0 - 24 

Depends on parameter, 

see respective parameter. 

Depends on parameter, 

see respective parameter. 

830 Over temp 

Stp 1396h:13m 

11.8.2 Trip Messages [820] - [890] 

Same information as for menu [810]. 



DeviceNet no: 



Modbus format 

31151–31185 

31201–31235 

31251–31285 

31301–31335 

31351–31385 

31401–31435 

31451–31485 

31501–31535 

122/40–122/74 

122/90–122/124 

122/140–122/174 

122/190–122/224 

122/240–123/18 

123/35 - 123/68 

123/85–123/118 

123/135–123/168 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Trip log list 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

Depends on parameter, see respective 

parameter. 

Depends on parameter, see respective 

parameter. 

All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data. For 

example DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 

contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm 

list 2. It is possible to read all parameters in alarm lists 

2–9 by recalculating the DeviceNet instance number 

into a Profibus slot/index number. This is done in the 

following way: 

slot no = abs((dev instance no-1)/255) 

index no = (dev instance no-1) modulo 255 

dev instance no = slot nox255+index no+1 

Example: We want to read out the process value out 

from alarm list 9. In alarm list 1 process value has the 

DeviceNet instance number 31102. In alarm list 9 it 

has DeviceNet instance no 31502 (see table 2 above). 

The corresponding slot/index no is then: 

slot no = abs((31502-1)/255)=123 

index no (modulo)= the remainder of the division 

above = 136, calculated as: (31502-1)-123x255=136 

11.8.3 Reset Trip Log [8A0] 

Resets the content of the 10 trip memories. 

8A0 Reset Trip 

Stp 

No 

Default: 

No 0 

Yes 1 

No 






UInt 

Modbus format 

UInt 



31038 software version 

31039 option version 

Profibus slot/index 121/182-183 


Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

NOTE: After the reset the setting goes automatically 

back to “NO”. The message “OK” is displayed for 2 sec. 

Table 25 

Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

software version 

11.9 System Data [900] 

Main menu for viewing all the VSD system data. 

11.9.1 VSD Data [920] 

VSD Type [921] 

Shows the VSD type according to the type number. 

The options are indicated on the type plate of the 

VSD. 

Bit 

7–0 minor 

13–8 major 

15–14 

Table 26 

Description 

release 

00: V, release version 

01: P, pre-release version 

10: , Beta version 

11: , Alpha version 

Information for Modbus and Profibus number, 

option version 

NOTE: If the control board is not configured, then type 

type shown is SX-D6160-EV 

Bit 

7–0 minor 

15–8 major 

Description 

921 SX-V 2.0 

Stp SX-D6160-EV 

Example of type 





Modbus format 

Long 

Text 

V 4.20 = Version of the Software 

NOTE: It is important that the software version displayed 

in menu [920] is the same software version number as 

the software version number written on the title page of 

this instruction manual. If not, the functionality as 

described in this manual may differ from the 

functionality of the VSD. 

Examples: 

SX-D6160-EVVSD-series suited for 690 volt mains 

supply, and a rated output current in normal duty of 

175A. 

Software [922] 

Shows the software version number of the VSD. 

Fig. 99 gives an example of the version number. 

922 Software 

Stp V 4.20 

Fig. 99 Example of software version 


Unit name [923] 

Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or 

customer identity. The function enables the user to 

define a name with 12 symbols. Use the Prev and 

Next key to move the cursor to the required position. 

Then use the + and - keys to scroll in the character list. 

Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the 

next position by pressing the Next key. See section 

User-defined Unit [323]. 

Example 

Create user name USER 15. 

1. When in the menu [923] press Next to move the 

cursor to the right most position. 

2. Press the + key until the character U is displayed. 

3. Press Next. 

4. Then press the + key until S is displayed and confirm 

with Next. 

5. Repeat until you have entered USER15. 

923 Unit Name 

Stp 

Default: 

No characters shown 



Profibus slot/index 165/225–236 


Modbus format 

UInt 

UInt 

When sending a unit name you send one character at 

a time starting at the right most position. 









12. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 

12.1 Trips, warnings and limits 

In order to protect the variable speed drive the principal 

operating variables are continuously monitored by 

the system. If one of these variables exceeds the 

safety limit an error/warning message is displayed. In 

order to avoid any possibly dangerous situations, the 

inverter sets itself into a stop Mode called Trip and the 

cause of the trip is shown in the display. 

Trips will always stop the VSD. Trips can be divided 

into normal and soft trips, depending on the setup Trip 

Type, see menu [250] Autoreset. Normal trips are 

default. For normal trips the VSD stops immediately, 

i.e. the motor coasts naturally to a standstill. For soft 

trips the VSD stops by ramping down the speed, i.e. 

the motor decelerates to a standstill. 

“Normal Trip” 

• The VSD stops immediately, the motor coasts to 

naturally to a standstill. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed. 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of 

the display). 

“Soft Trip” 

• the VSD stops by decelerating to a standstill. 

During the deceleration. 

• The accompanying trip message is displayed, 

including an additional soft trip indicator “S” before 

the trip time. 

• The Trip LED is blinking. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 

After standstill is reached. 

• The Trip LED is on. 

• The Trip relay or output is active (if selected). 

• The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of 

the display). 

Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more 

indicators to show that the inverter is in an “abnormal” 

situation. 

“Warning” 

• The inverter is close to a trip limit. 

• The Warning relay or output is active (if selected). 


• The accompanying warning message is displayed 

in window [722] Warning. 

• One of the warning indications is displayed (area F 

of the display). 

“Limits” 

• The inverter is limiting torque and/or frequency to 

avoid a trip. 

• The Limit relay or output is active (if selected). 


• One of the Limit status indications is displayed 

(area D of the display). 

Table 27 

Trip/Warning 

messages 

List of trips and warnings 

Selections 

Trip 

(Normal/ 

Soft) 

Motor I 2 t Trip/Off/Limit Normal/Soft I 2 t 

PTC Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Motor lost Trip/Off Normal 

Locked rotor Trip/Off Normal 

Ext trip Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Ext Mot Temp Via DigIn Normal/Soft 

Mon MaxAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Mon MinAlarm Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

Comm error Trip/Off/Warn Normal/Soft 

PT100 Trip/Off Normal/Soft 

Deviation Via Option Normal 

Pump Via Option Normal 

Over temp On Normal OT 

Over curr F On Normal 

Over volt D On Normal 

Over volt G On Normal 

Over volt On Normal 

Over speed On Normal 

Under voltage On Normal LV 

Power Fault On Normal 

Desat On Normal 

DClink error On Normal 

Ovolt m cut On Normal 

Over voltage Warning VL 

Safe stop Warning SST 

Motor PTC On Normal 

LC Level 

Trip/Off/Warn 

Via DigIn 

Normal/Soft 

Brake On Normal 

Warning 

indicators 

(Area D) 

LCL 

Omron SX inverter manual Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance 157

12.2 Trip conditions, causes and 

remedial action 

The table later on in this section must be seen as a 

basic aid to find the cause of a system failure and to 

how to solve any problems that arise. A variable speed 

drive is mostly just a small part of a complete VSD system. 

Sometimes it is difficult to determine the cause of 

the failure, although the variable speed drive gives a 

certain trip message it is not always easy to find the 

right cause of the failure. Good knowledge of the complete 

drive system is therefore necessary. Contact 

your supplier if you have any questions. 

The VSD is designed in such a way that it tries to avoid 

trips by limiting torque, overvolt etc. 

Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly 

after commissioning are most likely to be caused by 

incorrect settings or even bad connections. 

Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable 

period of failure-free operation can be caused by 

changes in the system or in its environment (e.g. 

wear). 

Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are 

generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference. Be 

sure that the installation fulfils the demands for installation 

stipulated in the EMC directives. See chapter 8. 

page 45. 

Sometimes the so-called “Trial and error” method is a 

quicker way to determine the cause of the failure. This 

can be done at any level, from changing settings and 

functions to disconnecting single control cables or 

replacing entire drives. 

The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether 

certain trips occur at certain moments. The Trip Log 

also records the time of the trip in relation to the run 

time counter. 

WARNING: If it is necessary to open the VSD 

or any part of the system (motor cable 

housing, conduits, electrical panels, 

cabinets, etc.) to inspect or take measurements 

as suggested in this instruction manual, it is 

absolutely necessary to read and follow the safety 

instructions in the manual. 

12.2.1 Technically qualified 

personnel 

Installation, commissioning, demounting, making 

measurements, etc., of or at the variable speed drive 

may only be carried out by personnel technically qualified 

for the task. 

12.2.2 Opening the variable speed 

drive 

The connections for the control signals and the 

switches are isolated from the mains voltage. Always 

take adequate precautions before opening the variable 

speed drive. 

12.2.3 Precautions to take with a 

connected motor 

If work must be carried out on a connected motor or 

on the driven machine, the mains voltage must always 

first be disconnected from the variable speed drive. 

Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing. 

12.2.4 Autoreset Trip 

If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has 

been reached, the trip message hour counter is 

marked with an “A”. 

Fig. 100 Autoreset trip 

WARNING: Always switch the mains voltage 

off if it is necessary to open the VSD and wait 

at least 5 minutes to allow the capacitors to 

discharge. 

WARNING: In case of malfunctioning always 

check the DC-link voltage, or wait one hour 

after the mains voltage has been switched 

off, before dismantling the VSD for repair. 

830 OVERVOLT G 

Trp A 345:45:12 

Fig. 100 shows the 3rd trip memory menu [830]: Overvoltage 

G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts 

took place after 345 hours, 45 minutes and 12 seconds 

of run time. 

158 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance Omron SX inverter manual

Table 28 

Trip condition, their possible causes and remedial action 

Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy 

Motor I 2 t 

“I 2 t” 

PTC 

Motor PTC 

Motor lost 

Locked rotor 

Ext trip 

Ext Mot Temp 

Mon MaxAlarm 

Mon MinAlarm 

Comm error 

PT100 

I 2 t value is exceeded. 

- Overload on the motor according to the 

programmed I 2 t settings. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 

is used. 

Motor thermistor (PTC) exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if [237] is enabled. 

Phase loss or too great imbalance on the 

motor phases 

Torque limit at motor standstill: 

- Mechanical blocking of the rotor. 

External input (DigIn 1-8) active: 

- active low function on the input. 



Max alarm level (overload) has been 

reached. 

Min alarm level (underload) has been 

reached. 

Error on serial communication (option) 

Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum 

level. 

NOTE: Only valid if option board PTC/PT100 

is used. 

- Check on mechanical overload on the 

motor or the machinery (bearings, 

gearboxes, chains, belts, etc.) 

- Change the Motor I 2 t Current setting 




- Check the motor cooling system. 

- Self-cooled motor at low speed, too high 

load. 

- Set PTC, menu [234] to OFF 






load. 

- Set PTC, menu [237] to OFF 

- Check the motor voltage on all phases. 

- Check for loose or poor motor cable 

connections 

- If all connections are OK, contact your 

supplier 

- Set motor lost alarm to OFF. 

- Check for mechanical problems at the 

motor or the machinery connected to the 

motor 

- Set locked rotor alarm to OFF. 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 

external input 

- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the equipment that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital 

inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.6, page 136. 

- Check the load condition of the machine 

- Check the monitor setting in section 11.6, page 136. 

- Check cables and connection of the 

serial communication. 

- Check all settings with regard to the 

serial communication 

- Restart the equipment including the 

VSD 






load. 

- Set PT100 to OFF 


Table 28 



Deviation 

Pump 

Over temp 

Over curr F 

Over volt D(eceleration) 

Over volt G(enerator) 

Over volt (Mains) 

O(ver) volt M(ains) cut 

Over speed 

Under voltage 

Power Fault 

Desat 

CRANE board detecting deviation in motor 

operation. 

NOTE: Only used in Crane Control. 

No master pump can be selected due to error 

in feedback signalling. 

NOTE: Only used in Pump Control. 

Heatsink temperature too high: 

- Too high ambient temperature of the 

VSD 

- Insufficient cooling 

- Too high current 

- Blocked or stuffed fans 

Motor current exceeds the peak VSD current: 

- Too short acceleration time. 

- Too high motor load 

- Excessive load change 

- Soft short-circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Poor or loose motor cable connections 

- Too high IxR Compensation level 

Too high DC Link voltage: 

- Too short deceleration time with 

respect to motor/machine inertia. 

- Too small brake resistor malfunctioning 

Brake chopper 

Too high DC Link voltage, due to too high 

mains voltage 

Motor speed measurement exceeds maximum 

level. 

Too low DC Link voltage: 

- Too low or no supply voltage 

- Mains voltage dip due to starting other 

major power consuming machines on 

the same line. 

Overload condition in the DC-link: 

- Hard short-circuit between phases or 

phase to earth 

- Saturation of current measurement 

circuiting 

- Earth fault 

- Desaturation of IGBTs 

- Peak voltage on DC link 

- Check encoder signals 

- Check Deviation jumper on Crane option board. 

- Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback signals 

- Check settings with regard to the pump feedback 

digital inputs 

- Check the cooling of the VSD cabinet. 

- Check the functionality of the built-in fans. The fans 

must switch on automatically if the heatsink temperature 

gets too high. At power up the fans are briefly 

switched on. 

- Check VSD and motor rating 

- Clean fans 

- Check the acceleration time settings and 

make them longer if necessary. 

- Check the motor load. 

- Check on bad motor cable connections 

- Check on bad earth cable connection 

- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and 

cable connections. 

- Lower the level of IxR Compensation [352] 

- Check the deceleration time settings and make them 

longer if necessary. 

- Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and the 

functionality of the Brake chopper (if used) 

- Check the main supply voltage 

- Try to take away the interference cause or use other 

main supply lines. 

Check encoder cables, wiring and setup 

Check motor data setup [22x] 

Perform short ID-run 

- Make sure all three phases are properly connected 

and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits 

of the VSD. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by 

other machinery 

- Use the function low voltage override [421] 


- Check on bad earth cable connection 

- Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and 

cable connections 

- Check that rating plate data of the motor is correctly 

entered 

- See overvoltage trips 

Power Fault Error on power board. - Check mains supply voltage 

Fan Error 

Error in fan module 

- Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and 

blocking material in fan module. 

HCB Error * Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) - Check mains supply voltage 


Table 28 



Desat 

Desat U+ * 

Desat U- * 

Desat V+ * 

Desat V- * 

Desat W+ * 

Desat W- * 

Desat BCC * 

DC link error 

PF Curr Err * 

PF Overvolt * 

Failure in output stage, 

desaturation of IGBTs 

DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum 

level 

Error in current balancing 

Error in voltage balancing 

PF Comm Err * Internal communication error Contact service 


- Check on bad earth cable connections 

- Check on water and moisture in the 

motor housing and cable connections 

- Make sure all three phases are properly 

connected and that the terminal screws are tightened. 

- Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits 

of the VSD. 

- Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by 

other machinery. 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections 

- Check motor. 

- Check fuses and line connections. 

PF Int Temp * Internal temperature too high Check internal fans 

PF Temp Err * Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service 

PF DC Err * 

PF HCB Err * 

PF Sup Err * 

LC Level 

Brake 

DC-link error and mains supply fault 

Error in controlled rectifier module (HCB) 

Mains supply fault 

Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir. 



NOTE: Only valid for VSD types with Liquid 

Cooling option. 

Brake tripped on brake fault (not released )or 

Brake not engaged during stop. 

- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check mains supply voltage 


- Check liquid cooling 

- Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the 


- Check the programming of the digital inputs DigIn 1-8 

- Check Brake acknowledge 

signal wiring to selected digital input. 

- Check programming of digital input DigIn 1-8, [520]. 

- Check circuit breaker feeding mechanical brake circuit. 

- Check mechanical brake if acknowledge signal is wired 

from brake limit switch. 

- Check brake contactor. 

* = 2...6 Module number if parallel power units (size 

300–1500 A) 

12.3 Maintenance 

The variable speed drive is designed not to require any 

servicing or maintenance. There are however some 

things which must be checked regularly. 

All variable speed drives have built-in fan which is 

speed controlled using heatsink temperature feedback. 

This means that the fans are only running if the 

VSD is running and loaded. The design of the heatsinks 

is such that the fan does not blow the cooling air 

through the interior of the VSD, but only across the 

outer surface of the heatsink. However, running fans 

will always attract dust. Depending on the environment 

the fan and the heatsink will collect dust. Check 

this and clean the heatsink and the fans when necessary. 

If variable speed drives are built into cabinets, also 

check and clean the dust filters of the cabinets regularly. 


Check external wiring, connections and control signals. 

Tighten terminal screws if necessary. 


13. Options 

The standard options available are described here 

briefly. Some of the options have their own instruction 

or installation manual. For more information please 

contact your supplier. 

13.1 Options for the control 

panel 

Order number 

Description 

01-3957-00 Panel kit complete including panel 

01-3957-01 Panel kit complete including blank panel 

Mounting cassette, blank panel and straight RS232- 

cable are available as options for the control panel. 

These options may be useful, for example after 

mounting a control panel in a cabinet door. 

on the application switch-on duration and duty-cycle. 

This option can not be after mounted. 

The following formula can be used to define the power 

of the connected brake resistor: 

Presistor = 

Where: 

P resistor 

Brake level V DC 

29) 

Rmin 

ED% 

WARNING: The table gives the minimum 

values of the brake resistors. Do not use 

resistors lower than this value. The VSD can 

trip or even be damaged due to high braking 

currents. 

(Brake level VDC)2 

Rmin 

x ED% 

required power of brake 

resistor 

DC brake voltage level (see Table 

minimum allowable brake resistor 

(see Table 30 and Table 31) 

effective braking period. Defined as: 

ED% = 

Active brake time at 

nominal braking 

power [s] 

120 [s] 

Maximum value of 

1= continuous braking 

Table 29 

Brake Voltage levels 

Supply voltage (V AC ) 

(set in menu [21B] 

Brake level (V DC ) 

220–240 380 

380–415 660 

Fig. 101 Control panel in mounting cassette 

13.2 PC Tool software 

The optional software that runs on a personal computer 

can be used to load parameter settings from the 

VSD to the PC for backup and printing. Recording can 

be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact 

OMRON sales for further information. 

440–480 780 

500–525 860 

550–600 1000 

660–690 1150 

13.3 Brake chopper 

All VSD sizes can be fitted with an optional built-in 

brake chopper. The brake resistor must be mounted 

outside the VSD. The choice of the resistor depends 

Omron SX inverter manual Options 163

Table 30 

Brake resistor SX-V 400V type 

Table 31 

Type 

Rmin [ohm] if supply 

380–415 V AC 

Rmin [ohm] if supply 

440–480 V AC 

SX-D4090-EV 3.8 4.4 



SX-*4160-EV 2 x 3.8 2 x 4.4 











Type 

Brake resistors SX-V 690V types 

Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] Rmin [ohm] 

500–525 V AC 550–600 V AC 660–690 V AC 

if supply if supply if supply 

SX-D6090-EV 4.9 5.7 6.5 

SX-D6110EV 4.9 5.7 6.5 



SX-*6200-EV 2 x 4.9 2 x 5.7 2 x 6.5 











SX-*61K0-EV 6 x 4.9 6 x 5.7 6 x 6.5 

NOTE: Although the VSD will detect a failure in the brake 

electronics, the use of resistors with a thermal overload 

which will cut off the power at overload is strongly 

recommended. 

The brake chopper option is built-in by the manufacturer 

and must be specified when the VSD is ordered. 

13.4 I/O Board 

Order number 

01-3876-01 I/O option board 2.0 

The I/O option board 2.0 provides three extra relay 

outputs and three extra digital inputs. The I/O Board 

works in combination with the Pump/Fan Control, but 

can also be used as a separate option. This option is 

described in a separate manual. 

13.5 Output coils 

Output coils, which are supplied separately, are recommended 

for lengths of screened motor cable 

longer than 100 m. Because of the fast switching of 

the motor voltage and the capacitance of the motor 

cable both line to line and line to earth screen, large 

switching currents can be generated with long lengths 

of motor cable. Output coils prevent the VSD from tripping 

and should be installed as closely as possible to 

the VSD. 

13.6 Serial communication and 

fieldbus 

Order number 

01-3876-04 RS232/485 

01-3876-05 Profibus DP 

01-3876-06 DeviceNet 

Description 

Description 

01-3876-09 Modbus/TCP, Ethernet 

For communication with the VSD there are several 

option boards for communication. There are different 

options for Fieldbus communication and one serial 

communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface 

which has galvanic isolation. 

13.7 Standby supply board 

164 Options Omron SX inverter manual

Order number 

option 

Description 

01-3954-00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting 

The standby supply board option provides the possibility 

of keeping the communication system up and 

running without having the 3-phase mains connected. 

One advantage is that the system can be set up without 

mains power. The option will also give backup for 

communication failure if main power is lost. 

The standby supply board option is supplied with 

external 

±10% 24 V DC or 24 V AC, protected by a 2 A slow acting 

fuse, from a double isolated transformer. The terminals 

X1:1 and X1:2 are voltage polarity independent. 

connecting 24 V DC to secure the supply voltage for 

the driver circuits of the power conductors via 

safety relay K1. See also Fig. 105. 

• High signal on the digital input, e.g. terminal 9 in 

Fig. 105, which is set to "Enable". For setting the 

digital input please refer to section 11.5.2, page 

126. 

These two signals need to be combined and used to 

enable the output of the VSD and make it possible to 

activate a Safe Stop condition. 

NOTE: The "Safe Stop" condition according to EN 954-1 

Category 3 can only be realized by de-activating both the 

"Inhibit" and "Enable" inputs. 

X1 

Must be 

double 

isolated 

~ 

X1:1 Left terminal 

X1:2 Right terminal 

Fig. 102 Connection of standby supply option 

Table 32 

X1 

terminal 

Name Function Specification 

1 Ext. supply 1 

2 Ext. supply 2 

External, VSD main 

24 V 

power independent, 

supply voltage AC ±10% 

DC or 24 

V 

Double isolated 

for control and communication 

circuits 

13.8 Safe Stop option 

To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance 

with EN954-1 Category 3, the following three parts 

need to be attended to: 

1. Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 (via Safe 

Stop option board). 

2. Enable input and control of VSD (via normal I/O 

control signals of VSD). 

3. Power conductor stage (checking status and feedback 

of driver circuits and IGBT’s). 

To enable the VSD to operate and run the motor, the 

following signals should be active: 

• "Inhibit" input, terminals 1 (DC+) and 2 (DC-) on the 

Safe Stop option board should be made active by 


When the "Safe Stop" condition is achieved by using 

these two different methods, which are independently 

controlled, this safety circuit ensures that the motor 

will not start running because: 

• The 24V DC signal is taken away from the "Inhibit" 

input, terminals 1 and 2, the safety relay K1 is 

switched off. 

The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power conductors 

is switched off. This will inhibit the trigger pulses to 

the power conductors. 

• The trigger pulses from the control board are shut 

down. 

The Enable signal is monitored by the controller circuit 

which will forward the information to the PWM part on the 

Control board. 

To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been 

switched off, this should be guarded externally to 

ensure that this relay did not refuse to act. The Safe 

Stop option board offers a feedback signal for this via 

a second forced switched safety relay K2 which is 

switched on when a detection circuit has confirmed 

that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is shut 

down. See Table 33 for the contacts connections. 

To monitor the "Enable" function, the selection "RUN" 

on a digital output can be used. For setting a digital 

output, e.g. terminal 20 in the example Fig. 105, 

please refer to section 11.5.4, page 132 [540]. 

When the "Inhibit" input is de-activated, the VSD display 

will show a blinking "SST" indication in section D 

(bottom left corner) and the red Trip LED on the Control 

panel will blink. 

To resume normal operation, the following steps have 

to be taken: 

• Release "Inhibit" input; 24V DC (High) to terminal 1 

and 2. 

• Give a STOP signal to the VSD, according to the 

set Run/Stop Control in menu [215]. 

• Give a new Run command, according to the set 

Run/Stop Control in menu [215]. 

NOTE: The method of generating a STOP command is 

dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level/ 

Edge [21A] and the use of a separate Stop input via 

digital input. 

WARNING: The safe stop function can never 

be used for electrical maintenance. For 

electrical maintenance the VSD should 

always be disconnected from the supply 

voltage. 

Fig. 103 Connection of safe stop option in size B and C. 

Fig. 104 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up. 

Table 33 

X1 

pin 

Specification of Safe Stop option board 

Name Function Specification 

1 Inhibit + Inhibit driver circuits of 

2 Inhibit - power conductors 

3 

4 

NO contact 

relay K2 

P contact 

relay K2 

Feedback; confirmation 

of activated inhibit 

5 GND Supply ground 

6 +24 VDC 

Supply Voltage for operating 

Inhibit input only. 

1 

2 3 4 5 

6 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

DC 24 V 

(20–30 V) 

48 V DC / 

30 V AC /2 A 

+24 V DC , 

50 mA 


Safe Stop 

+5V 

Power board 

= 

X1 

1 

2 

K1 

3 

4 

K2 

= 

U 

5 

6 

+24 V DC 

~ 

V 

W 

X1 

Enable 

10 

DigIn 

Controller 

PWM 

Stop 

20 

DigOut 

Fig. 105 

13.9 Encoder 

Order number 

Description 

01-3876-03 Encoder 2.0 option board 

The Encoder 2.0 option board, used for connection of 

feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an 

incremental encoder is described in a separate manual. 

13.10PTC/PT100 

Order number 

Description 

01-3876-08 PTC/PT100 2.0 option board 

The PTC/PT100 2.0 option board for connecting 

motor thermistors to the VSD is described in a separate 




14. Technical Data 

14.1 Electrical specifications 

related to model 

Table 34 

Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V 

Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 

(120%, 1 min every 10 min) 

Power @400V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Heavy duty 


Power @400V 

[kW] 

Rated current 

[A] 

Frame size 

SX-D4090-EV 210 90 175 75 140 E 



SX-*4160-EV 360 160 300 132 240 


SX-*4220EV 516 220 430 200 344 


SX-*4315-EV 720 315 600 250 







F 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature. 

Table 35 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Heavy duty 


Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] 

Frame size 




SX-D6160EV 210 160 175 132 140 







F69 

H69 

I69 

Omron SX inverter manual Technical Data 169

Table 35 


Model 

Max. output 

current [A]* 

Normal duty 


Heavy duty 


Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] Power @690V [kW] Rated current [A] 

Frame size 

SX-*6600-EV 720 600 600 450 

SX-*6630EV 780 630 650 500 520 




SX-*61K0-EV 1200 1000 1000 800 800 

J69 

K69 

* Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature. 

170 Technical Data Omron SX inverter manual

14.2 General electrical specifications 

Table 36 

General electrical specifications 

General 

Mains voltage: 

SX-4xxx-EV 

SX-6xxx-EV 

Mains frequency: 

Input power factor: 

Output voltage: 

Output frequency: 

Output switching frequency: 

Efficiency at nominal load: 

230-480V +10%/-10% 

500-690V +10%/-15% 

45 to 65 Hz 

0.95 

0–Mains supply voltage: 

0–400 Hz 

3 kHz (adjustable 1,5-6 kHz) 

98% 

Control signal inputs: 

Analogue (differential) 

Analogue Voltage/current: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Resolution: 

Hardware accuracy: 

Non-linearity 

Digital: 

Input voltage: 

Max. input voltage: 

Input impedance: 

Signal delay: 

Control signal outputs 

Analogue 

Output voltage/current: 

Max. output voltage: 

Short-circuit current (): 

Output impedance: 

Resolution: 

Maximum load impedance for current 

Hardware accuracy: 

Offset: 

Non-linearity: 

Digital 

Output voltage: 

Shortcircuit current(): 

Relays 

Contacts 

References 

+10VDC 

-10VDC 

+24VDC 

0-±10 V/0-20 mA via switch 

+30 V/30 mA 

20 k(voltage) 

250 (current) 

11 bits + sign 

1% type + 1 ½ LSB fsd 

1½ LSB 

High: >9 VDC, Low: 23 VDC open 

Low:

14.3 Operation at higher 

temperatures 

OMRON variable speed drives are made for operation 

at maximum of 40°C ambient temperature. However, 

for most models, it is possible to use the VSD at 

higher temperatures with little loss in performance. 

Table 37 shows ambient temperatures as well as derating 

for higher temperatures. 

Table 37 

Ambient temperature and derating 400–690 V types 

Model SX-V 

SX-D4090-EV to SX-D4132-EV 

SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6160-EV 

SX-*4160-EV to SX-*4800-EV 

SX-*6200-EV to SX-*61K0-EV 

IP20 

IP54 

Max temp. Derating: possible Max temp. Derating: possible 

– – 40°C Yes,-2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 40°C -2.5%/°C to max +5°C 

Example 

In this example we have a motor with the following 

data that we want to run at the ambient temperature 

of 45°C: 

Voltage 400 V 

Current 165 A 

Power 90 kW 

Select variable speed drive 

The ambient temperature is 5 °C higher than the maximum 

ambient temperature. The following calculation 

is made to select the correct VSD model. 

Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2.5%/ 

°C. 

Derating will be: 5 X 2.5% = 12.5% 

Calculation for model SX-D4090-EV 

175 A - (12.5% X 175) = 154A; this is not enough. 

Calculation for model SX-D4110-EV 

210 A - (12.5% X 210) = 184 A 

In this example we select the SX-D4110-EV. 

page 72. At switching frequencies >3 kHz derating 

might be needed. 

Table 38 

Switching frequency 

Models 

Standard 

Switching 

frequency 

Range 

SX-*4xxx-EV 3 kHz 1.5–6 kHz 

SX-*6xxx-EV 3 kHz 1.5–6 kHz 

14.4 Operation at higher 

switching frequency 

Table 38 shows the switching frequency for the different 

VSD models. With the possibility of running at 

higher switching frequency you can reduce the noise 

level from the motor. The switching frequency is set in 

menu [22A], Motor sound, see section section 11.2.3, 


14.5 Dimensions and Weights 

The table below gives an overview of the dimensions 

and weights. The models SX-D4090-EV to SX-D4132-EV 

in 400V and SX-D6090-EV to SX-D6250-EV in 690V are 

available in IP54 as wall mounted modules. The models 

SX-*4160-EV to SX-*4800-EV in 400V and SX-*6315- 

EV to SX-*61K0-EV in 690V consist of 2, 3, 4 or 6 paralleled 

power electonic building block (PEBB) available 

in IP20 as wall mounted modules and in IP54 

mounted standard cabinet 

Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 

standard. 

Table 39 

Mechanical specifications, SX-V 400V 

Models 

Frame 

size 

Dim. H x W x D [mm] 

IP20 (-A4xxx) 


IP54 (-D4xxx) 

Weight IP20 

[kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

4090 E – 950 x 285 x 314 – 60 

4110 to 4132 F – 950 x 345 x 314 – 74 

4160 to 4200 G 1036 x 500 x 390 2330 x 600 x 500 140 270 

4220 to 4250 H 1036 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 170 305 

4315 to 4400 I 1036 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 248 440 

4450 to 4500 J 1036 x 1100 x 450 2330 x 1200 x 600 340 580 

4630 to 4800 K 1036 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 496 860 

Table 40 

Mechanical specifications, SX-V 690V 

Models 

Frame 

size 


IP20 (-A6xxx) 


IP54 (-A6xxx) 

Weight IP20 

[kg] 

Weight IP54 

[kg] 

6090 to 6160 F69 – 1090 x 345 x 314 – 77 

6200 to 6355 H69 1176 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 176 311 

6450 to 6500 I69 1176 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 257 449 

6600 to 6630 J69 1176 x 1100 x 450 2330 x 1200 x 600 352 592 

6710 to 61K0 K69 1176 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 514 878 


14.6 Environmental conditions 

Table 41 

Operation 

Parameter 

Normal operation 

Nominal ambient temperature 

Atmospheric pressure 

0C–40C See table, see Table 37 for different conditions 

86–106 kPa 

Relative humidity, non-condensing 0–90% 

Contamination, 

according to IEC 60721-3-3 

Vibrations 

No electrically conductive dust allowed. Cooling air must be clean and free from corrosive 

materials. Chemical gases, class 3C2. Solid particles, class 3S2. 

According to IEC 600068-2-6, Sinusodial vibrations: 

•10

Table 43 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for 400V 

Model 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

Maximum 

value fuse 

[A] 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

Cable glands (clamping range 

[mm]) 

mains/ motor Brake PE mains / motor Brake 

SX-*4315-EV 520 630 


(3x)35-240 frame -- -- 

SX-*4400-EV 648 710 (3x)35-240 frame -- -- 



(4x)35-240 frame -- -- 



(6x)35-240 frame -- -- 

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in. 

Table 44 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands for 690V 

Model 

Nominal 

input 

current 

[A] 

Maximum 

value fuse 

[A] 

Cable cross section connector range [mm 2 ] for 

Cable glands (clamping range 

[mm]) 

mains/ motor Brake PE mains / motor Brake 

SX-D6090-EV 78 100 












16 - 95 16 - 95 

35 - 150 16 - 95 

35-150 

1. Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in. 

35-150 

(16-95) 

16-95 

(16-70)¹ 

35-150 

(16-70)¹ 

35-240 

(95-185)¹ 

35-150 

(16-70)¹ 

Ø27-66 cable entry 

(2x)35-150 frame --- -- 

(3x)35-150 frame -- -- 

(4x)35-150 frame -- -- 

SX-*6710-EV 648 710 (6x)35-150 frame -- -- 



SX-*61K0-EV 864 1000 

(6x)35-150 frame -- -- 

--- 



14.7.2 Fuses and cable dimensions 

according NEMA ratings 

Table 45 

Types and fuses 

Model 

Input 

current 

[Arms] 

UL 

Class J TD (A) 

Mains input fuses 

Ferraz-Shawmut 

type 

SX-D4090-EV 152 175 AJT175 



SX-*4160-EV 260 300 AJT300 






SX-*4400-EV 648 700 A4BQ700 






Table 46 

Type cables cross-sections and glands 

Cable cross section connector 

Model 

Mains and motor Brake PE 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Range 

Tightening 

torque 

Nm/ft lbf 

Cable type 


AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

AWG 4/0 - 300 kcmil 

14 / 10.5 

24 / 18 

AWG 4 - AWG 3/0 

14 / 10.5 

AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

(AWG 4 - AWG 2/0)¹ 

14 / 10.5 

(10 / 7.5)¹ 



AWG 3/0 - 

400 kcmil 

24 / 18 

AWG 1 - AWG 3/0 

AWG 4/0 - 300 

kcmil 

14 / 10.5 

24 / 18 

AWG 3/0 - 400 kcmil 

(AWG 4/0 - 400 

kcmil)¹ 

24 / 18 

(10 / 7.5)¹ 

SX-*4160-EV 2 x AWG 4/0 - 

SX-*4200-EV 2 x 300 kcmil 

24 / 18 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 



SX-*4315-EV 



3 x AWG 4/0 - 

3 x 300 kcmil 

24 / 18 

24 / 18 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

2 x AWG 3/0 - 

2 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 

24 / 18 frame - 

Copper (Cu) 

75°C 



24 / 18 

3 x AWG 3/0 - 

3 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 



24 / 18 

6 x AWG 3/0 - 

6 x 400 kcmil 

24 / 18 frame - 


14.8 Control signals 

Table 47 

Terminal Name: Function (Default): Signal: Type: 

1 +10 V +10 VDC Supply voltage +10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

2 AnIn1 Process reference 

3 AnIn2 Off 

4 AnIn3 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 

analogue input 

bipolar: -10 - +10 VDC or -20 - +20 mA 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



5 AnIn4 Off 

0 -10 VDC or 0/4–20 mA 



6 -10 V -10VDC Supply voltage -10 VDC, max 10 mA output 

7 Common Signal ground 0V output 

8 DigIn 1 RunL 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

9 DigIn 2 RunR 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

10 DigIn 3 Off 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

11 +24 V +24VDC Supply voltage +24 VDC, 100 mA output 

12 Common Signal ground 0 V output 

13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

14 AnOut 2 0 to max torque 0 ±10 VDC or 0/4– +20 mA analogue output 

15 Common Signal ground 0 V output 





20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

21 DigOut 2 Brake 24 VDC, 100 mA digital output 

22 DigIn 8 RESET 0-8/24 VDC digital input 

Terminal X2 

31 N/C 1 Relay 1 output 

32 COM 1 

33 N/O 1 

Trip, active when the 

VSD is in a TRIP condition 

N/C is opened when the relay is active 

(valid for all relays) 

N/O is closed when the relay is active 

(valid for all relays) 

potential free change over 

0.1 – 2 A/U max 250 VAC or 42 VDC 

relay output 

Terminal X3 

41 N/C 2 

42 COM 2 

43 N/O 2 

Relay 2 Output 

Run, active when the 

VSD is started 



relay output 

51 COM 3 Relay 3 Output 

52 N/O 3 Off 



relay output 



15. Menu List 

DEFAULT 

244 Copy to CP No Copy 

CUSTOM 

100 Preferred View 

DEFAULT 

110 1st Line Process Val 

120 2nd Line Current 

200 Main Setup 

210 Operation 

211 Language English 

212 Select Motor M1 

213 Drive Mode V/Hz 

214 Ref Control Remote 

215 Run/Stp Ctrl Remote 

216 Reset Ctrl Remote 

217 Local/Rem Off 

2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 

2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 

218 Lock Code? 0 

219 Rotation R+L 

21A Level/Edge Level 

21B Supply Volts Not Defined 

220 Motor Data 

221 Motor Volts U NOM V 

222 Motor Freq 50Hz 

223 Motor Power (P NOM ) W 

224 Motor Curr (I NOM ) A 

225 Motor Speed (n MOT ) rpm 

226 Motor Poles - 

227 Motor Cos 

Depends on 

P nom 

228 Motor Vent Self 

229 Motor ID-Run Off 

22A Motor Sound F 

22B Encoder Off 

22C Enc Pulses 1024 

22D Enc Speed 0rpm 

230 Mot Protect 

231 Mot I 2 t Type Trip 

232 Mot I 2 t Curr 100% 

233 Mot I 2 t Time 60s 

234 Thermal Prot Off 

235 Motor Class F 140C 

236 PT100 Inputs 

237 Motor PTC Off 

240 Set Handling 

241 Select Set A 

242 Copy Set A>B 

243 Default>Set A 

CUSTOM 

245 Load from CP No Copy 

250 Autoreset 

251 No of Trips 0 

252 Overtemp Off 

253 Overvolt D Off 

254 Overvolt G Off 

255 Overvolt Off 

256 Motor Lost Off 

257 Locked Rotor Off 

258 Power Fault Off 

259 Undervoltage Off 

25A Motor I 2 t Off 

25B Motor I 2 t TT Trip 

25C PT100 Off 

25D PT100 TT Trip 

25E PTC Off 

25F PTC TT Trip 

25G Ext Trip Off 

25H Ext Trip TT Trip 

25I Com Error Off 

25J Com Error TT Trip 

25K Min Alarm Off 

25L Min Alarm TT Trip 

25M Max Alarm Off 

25N Max Alarm TT Trip 

25O Over curr F Off 

25P Pump Off 

25Q Over speed Off 

25R Ext Mot Temp Off 

25S Ext Mot TT Trip 

25T LC Level Off 

25U LC Level TT Trip 

260 Serial Com 

261 Com Type RS232/485 

262 RS232/485 

2621 Baudrate 9600 

2622 Address 1 

263 Fieldbus 

2631 Address 62 

2632 PrData Mode Basic 

2633 Read/Write RW 

2634 AddPrValue 0 

264 Comm Fault 

2641 ComFlt Mode Off 

2642 ComFlt Time 0.5 s 

265 Ethernet 

Omron SX inverter manual Menu List 181

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

2651 IP Address 0.0.0.0 

33C Brk Release 0.00s 

2652 MAC Address 

000000000 

000 

2653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 

2654 Gateway 0.0.0.0 

2655 DHCP Off 

266 FB Signal 










266A FB Signal 10 

266B FB Signal 11 

266C FB Signal 12 

266D FB Signal 13 

266E FB Signal 14 

266F FB Signal 15 

266G FB Signal 16 

269 FB Status 

300 Process 

310 Set/View ref 

320 Proc Setting 

321 Proc Source Speed 

322 Proc Unit Off 

323 User Unit 0 

324 Process Min 0 

325 Process Max 0 

326 Ratio Linear 

327 F(Val) PrMin Min 

328 F(Val) PrMax Max 

330 Start/Stop 

331 Acc Time 10.00s 

332 Dec Time 10.00s 

333 Acc MotPot 16.00s 

334 Dec MotPot 16.00s 

335 Acc>Min Spd 10.00s 

336 Dec

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

399 Start Delay 0s 

41C5 Load Curve 5 100% 

39A Stop Delay 0s 


39B Upp Band Lim 0% 


39C Low Band Lim 0% 


39D Settle Start 0s 


39E TransS Start 60% 

420 Process Prot 

39F Settle Stop 0s 

421 Low Volt OR On 

39G TransS Stop 60% 

422 Rotor Locked Off 

39H Run Time 1 00:00:00 

423 Motor lost Off 

39H1 Rst Run Tm1 No 

424 Overvolt Ctrl On 

39I Run Time 2 00:00:00 

500 I/Os 

39I1 Rst Run Tm2 No 

510 An Inputs 

39J Run Time 3 00:00:00 

511 AnIn1 Fc Process Ref 

39J1 Rst Run Tm3 No 

512 AnIn1 Setup 4-20mA 

39K Run Time 4 00:00:00 

513 AnIn1 Advn 

39K1 Rst Run Tm4 No 

5131 AnIn1 Min 4mA 

39L Run Time05 00:00:00 

5132 AnIn1 Max 20.00mA 

39L1 Rst Run Tm5 No 

5133 AnIn1 Bipol 20.00mA 

39M Run Time 6 00:00:00 

5134 AnIn1 FcMin Min 

39M1 Rst Run Tm6 

No 

5135 AnIn1 ValMin 0 

39N Pump 123456 

5136 AnIn1 FcMax Max 

400 Monitor/Prot 

5137 AnIn1 ValMax 0 

410 Load Monitor 

5138 AnIn1 Oper Add+ 

411 Alarm Select Off 

5139 AnIn1 Filt 0.1s 

412 Alarm trip Off 

513A AnIn1 Enabl On 

413 Ramp Alarm Off 

514 AnIn2 Fc Off 

414 Start Delay 2s 


415 Load Type Basic 


416 Max Alarm 


4161 MaxAlarmMar 15% 

5162 AnIn2 Max 20.00mA 

4162 MaxAlarmDel 0.1s 


417 Max Pre alarm 


4171 MaxPreAlMar 10% 


4172 MaxPreAlDel 0.1s 


418 Min Pre Alarm 


4181 MinPreAlMar 10% 


4182 MinPreAlDel 0.1s 


419 Min Alarm 


4191 MinAlarmMar 15% 

517 AnIn3 Fc Off 

4192 MinAlarmDel 0.1s 


41A Autoset Alrm No 


41B Normal Load 100% 


41C 

Load Curve 

5192 AnIn3 Max 20.00mA 










DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 


535 AnOut2 Setup 4-20mA 


536 AnOut2 Advan 


5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 


5362 AnOut 2 Max 20.0mA 

51A AnIn4 Fc Off 

5363 AnOut2Bipol 20.0mA 

51B AnIn4 Setup 4-20mA 

5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 

51C 

AnIn4 Advan 

5365 AnOut2 VlMin 0 

51C1 AnIn4 Min 4mA 

5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 

51C2 AnIn4 Max 20.00mA 

5367 AnOut2 VlMax 0 

51C3 AnIn4 Bipol 20.00mA 

540 Dig Outputs 

51C4 AnIn4 FcMin Min 

541 DigOut 1 Ready 

51C5 AnIn4 ValMin 0 

542 DigOut 2 No Trip 

51C6 AnIn4 FcMax Max 

550 Relays 

51C7 AnIn4 ValMax 0 

551 Relay 1 Trip 

51C8 AnIn4 Oper Add+ 

552 Relay 2 Run 

51C9 AnIn4 Filt 0.1s 

553 Relay 3 Off 

51CA AnIn4 Enabl On 

554 B(oard)1 Relay 1 Off 

520 Dig Inputs 


521 DigIn 1 RunL 


522 DigIn 2 RunR 







55A 

B(oard)3 Relay 1 Off 


55B 



55C 


528 DigIn 8 Reset 

55D 

Relay Adv 

529 B(oard)1 DigIn 1 Off 

55D1 Relay 1 Mode N.O 

52A 

B(oard)1 DigIn 2 Off 


52B 



52C 


55D4 B1R1 Mode N.O 

52D 



52E 



52F 



52G 



52H 



530 An Outputs 

55DA B3R1 Mode N.O 

531 AnOut1 Fc Speed 

55DB B3R2 Mode N.O 

532 AnOut1 Setup 4-20mA 

55DC B3R3 Mode N.O 

533 AnOut1 Adv 

560 Virtual I/Os 

5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 

561 VIO 1 Dest Off 

5332 AnOut 1 Max 20.0mA 

562 VIO 1 Source Off 

5333 AnOut1Bipol 20.0mA 


5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min 


5335 AnOut1 VlMin 0 


5336 AnOut1 FcMax Max 


5337 AnOut1 VlMax 0 


534 AnOut2 FC Torque 


184 Menu List Omron SX inverter manual

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 


712 Speed 

56A VIO 5 Source Off 

713 Torque 

56B VIO 6 Dest Off 


56C VIO 6 Source Off 

715 Electrical Power 

56D VIO 7 Dest Off 

716 Current 

56E VIO 7 Source Off 

717 Output volt 

56F VIO 8 Dest Off 

718 Frequency 

56G VIO 8 Source Off 

719 DC Voltage 

600 Logical&Timers 

71A 

Heatsink Tmp 

610 Comparators 

71B 

PT100_1_2_3 

611 CA1 Value Speed 

720 Status 

612 CA1 Level HI 300rpm 

721 VSD Status 

613 CA1 Level LO 200rpm 

722 Warning 

614 CA2 Value Torque 

723 DigIn Status 

615 CA2 Level HI 20% 

724 DigOut Status 

616 CA2 Level LO 10% 

725 AnIn Status 1-2 

617 CD1 Run 

726 AnIn Status 3-4 

618 CD2 DigIn 1 

620 Logic Output Y 

621 Y Comp 1 CA1 

622 Y Operator 1 & 

623 Y Comp 2 !A2 

624 Y Operator 2 & 

625 Y Comp 3 CD1 

630 Logic Z 

631 Z Comp 1 CA1 

632 Z Operator 1 & 

633 Z Comp2 !A2 

634 Z Operator 2 & 

635 Z Comp 3 CD1 

640 Timer1 

641 Timer1 Trig Off 

642 Timer1 Mode Off 

643 Timer1 Delay 0:00:00 

644 Timer 1 T1 0:00:00 

645 Timer1 T2 0:00:00 

649 Timer1 Value 0:00:00 

650 Timer2 

651 Timer2 Trig Off 

652 Timer2 Mode Off 

653 Timer2 Delay 0:00:00 

654 Timer 2 T1 0:00:00 

655 Timer2 T2 0:00:00 

659 Tmer2 Value 0:00:00 

700 Oper/Status 

710 Operation 

711 Process Val 

727 

AnOut Status 1- 

2 

728 IO Status B1 

729 IO Status B2 

72A IO Status B3 

730 Stored Val 

731 Run Time 00:00:00 

7311 Reset RunTm No 

732 Mains Time 00:00:00 

733 Energy kWh 

7331 Rst Energy No 

800 View TripLog 

810 Trip Message 

811 Process Value 

812 Speed 

813 Torque 



816 Current 

817 Output voltage 

818 Frequency 

819 DC Link voltage 

81A Heatsink Tmp 

81B PT100_1, 2, 3 

81C FI Status 

81D DigIn status 

81E DigOut status 

81F AnIn status 1 2 

81G AnIn status 3 4 

81H AnOut status 1 2 


DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

81I 

IO Status B1 


81J 

IO Status B2 

83I 

IO Status B1 

81K 

IO Status B3 

83J 

IO Status B2 

81L 

Run Time 

83K 

IO Status B3 

81M 

Mains Time 

83L 

Run Time 

81N 

Energy 

83M 

Mains Time 

820 Trip Message 

83N 

Energy 


840 

822 Speed 


823 Torque 

842 Speed 


843 Torque 



826 Current 



846 Current 

828 Frequency 



848 Frequency 

82A 

Heatsink Tmp 


82B PT100_1, 2, 3 

84A 

Heatsink Tmp 

82C 

FI Status 

84B PT100_1, 2, 3 

82D 

DigIn status 

84C 

FI Status 

82E 

DigOut status 

84D 

DigIn status 


84E 

DigOut status 





82I 

IO Status B1 


82J 

IO Status B2 

84I 

IO Status B1 

82K 

IO Status B3 

84J 

IO Status B2 

82L 

Run Time 

84K 

IO Status B3 

82M 

Mains Time 

84L 

Run Time 

82N 

Energy 

84M 

Mains Time 

830 

84N 

Energy 


850 

832 Speed 


833 Torque 

852 Speed 


853 Torque 



836 Current 



856 Current 

838 Frequency 



858 Frequency 

83A 

Heatsink Temperature 


83B PT100_1, 2, 3 

85A 

Heatsink Tmp 

83C 

FI Status 

85B PT100_1, 2, 3 

83D 

DigIn status 

85C 

FI Status 

83E 

DigOut status 

85D 

DigIn status 


85E 

DigOut status 

83G AIn status 3 4 

85F AnIn 1 2 


DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

DEFAULT 

CUSTOM 

85G AnIn 3 4 


85H AnIOut 1 2 


85I 

IO Status B1 


85J 

IO Status B2 

87I 

IO Status B1 

85K 

IO Status B3 

87J 

IO Status B2 

85L 

Run Time 

87K 

IO Status B3 

85M 

Mains Time 

87L 

Run Time 

85N 

Energy 

87M 

Mains Time 

860 

87N 

Energy 


880 

862 Speed 


863 Torque 

882 Speed 


818 Torque 



866 Current 



886 Current 

868 Frequency 



888 Frequency 

86A 

Heatsink Tmp 


86B PT100_1, 2, 3 

88A 

Heatsink Tmp 

86C 

FI Status 

88B PT100_1, 2, 3 

86D 

DigIn status 

88C 

FI Status 

86E 

DigOut status 

88D 

DigIn status 

86F AnIn 1 2 

88E 

DigOut status 

86G AnIn 3 4 


86H AnOut 1 2 


86I 

IO Status B1 


86J IO Status B 2 

88I 

IO Status B1 

86K 

IO Status B3 

88J 

IO Status B2 

86L 

Run Time 

88K 

IO Status B3 

86M 

Mains Time 

88L 

Run Time 

86N 

Energy 

88M 

Mains Time 

870 

88N 

Energy 


890 

872 Speed 


873 Torque 

892 Speed 


893 Torque 



876 Current 



896 Current 

878 Frequency 



898 Frequency 

87A 

Heatsink Tmpe 


87B PT100_1, 2, 3 

89A 

Heatsink Tmp 

87C 

FI Status 

89B PT100_1, 2, 3 

87D 

DigIn status 

89C 

FI Status 

87E 

DigOut status 

89D 

DigIn status 


89E 

DEFAULT 

DigOut status 




89I 

89J 

89K 

89L 

89M 

89N 

IO Status B1 

IO Status B2 

IO Status B3 

Run Time 

Mains Time 

Energy 

8A0 Reset Trip No 

900 System Data 

920 VSD Data 

921 VSD Type 

922 Software 

923 Unit name 0 

CUSTOM 


Index 

Symbols 

+10VDC Supply voltage .............................................179 

+24VDC Supply voltage .............................................179 

Numerics 

-10VDC Supply voltage ..............................................179 

4-20mA ......................................................................122 

A 

Abbreviations ................................................................10 

Acceleration ............................................................89, 91 

Acceleration ramp ..................................................91 

Acceleration time ...................................................89 

Ramp type .............................................................91 

Alarm trip ...................................................................114 

Alternating MASTER .................................................106 

Ambient temperature and derating .............................172 

Analogue comparators ................................................136 

Analogue input ...........................................................119 

AnIn1 ..................................................................119 

AnIn2 ..........................................................124, 125 

Offset ..........................................................121, 129 

Analogue Output ........................................128, 131, 179 

AnOut 1 ......................................................128, 131 

Output configuration ..................................129, 132 

AND operator ............................................................140 

AnIn2 .........................................................................125 

AnIn3 .........................................................................125 

AnIn4 .........................................................................126 

Autoreset ....................................................3, 39, 74, 158 

Autotune ....................................................................100 

B 

Baudrate ...........................................................51, 81, 82 

Brake chopper .............................................................163 

Brake function ........................................................92, 93 

Bake release time ...................................................92 

Brake .....................................................................93 

Brake Engage Time ...............................................93 

Brake wait time .....................................................93 

Release speed .........................................................93 

Vector Brake ..........................................................94 

Brake functions 

Frequency ............................................................119 

Brake resistors .............................................................163 

C 

Cable cross-section ......................................................174 

Cable specifications .......................................................20 

CE-marking ....................................................................9 

Change Condition ......................................................106 

Change Timer ....................................................106, 107 

Clockwise rotary field .................................................126 

Comparators ...............................................................136 

Connecting control signals ............................................30 

Connections 

Brake chopper connections .................................... 17 

Control signal connections .................................... 30 

Mains supply ................................................... 17, 24 

Motor earth ..................................................... 17, 24 

Motor output .................................................. 17, 24 

Safety earth ..................................................... 17, 24 

Control panel ............................................................... 47 

Control Panel memory ................................................. 40 

Copy all settings to Control Panel ......................... 74 

Frequency ........................................................... 119 

Control signal connections ........................................... 30 

Control signals ....................................................... 28, 30 

Edge-controlled ............................................... 39, 63 

Level-controlled .............................................. 39, 63 

Counter-clockwise rotary field .................................... 126 

Current ........................................................................ 28 

Current control (0-20mA) ............................................ 32 

D 

DC-link residual voltage ................................................. 1 

Deceleration ................................................................. 89 

Deceleration time .................................................. 89 

Ramp type ............................................................. 91 

Declaration of Conformity ............................................. 9 

Default ......................................................................... 73 

Definitions ................................................................... 10 

Derating ..................................................................... 172 

Digital comparators .................................................... 136 

Digital inputs 

Board Relay ......................................................... 134 

DigIn 1 ............................................................... 126 

DigIn 2 ............................................................... 127 

DigIn 3 ............................................................... 127 

Dismantling and scrapping ........................................... 10 

Display ......................................................................... 47 

Double-ended connection ............................................ 31 

Drive mode .................................................................. 60 

Frequency ........................................................... 119 

Drives on Change ............................................... 106, 107 

E 

ECP ........................................................................... 163 

Edge control ..................................................... 39, 63, 64 

Electrical specification ................................................ 171 

EMC ............................................................................ 17 

Current control (0-20mA) .................................... 32 

Double-ended connection ..................................... 31 

RFI mains filter ..................................................... 17 

Single-ended connection ....................................... 31 

Twisted cables ....................................................... 32 

Emergency stop ............................................................ 45 

EN60204-1 .................................................................... 9 

EN61800-3 .................................................................... 9 

EN61800-5-1 ................................................................. 9 

Enable ............................................................ 38, 48, 126 

EXOR operator .......................................................... 140 

Expression .................................................................. 140 


External Control Panel ...............................................163 

F 

Factory settings .............................................................73 

Fans ............................................................................105 

Fieldbus ................................................................82, 164 

Fixed MASTER ..................................................105, 106 

Flux optimization .........................................................98 

Frequency ...................................................................146 

Frequency priority .................................................37 

Jog Frequency ........................................................97 

Maximum Frequency ......................................95, 96 

Minimum Frequency .............................................95 

Preset Frequency ....................................................99 

Skip Frequency ......................................................96 

Frequency priority ........................................................37 

Fuses, cable cross-sections and glands ..........................174 

G 

General electrical specifications ...................................171 

I 

I/O Board ...................................................................164 

I2t protection 

Motor I2t Current .....................................69, 70, 71 

Motor I2t Type .....................................................69 

ID run ....................................................................40, 66 

Identification Run ..................................................40, 66 

IEC269 .......................................................................174 

Internal speed control .................................................100 

Internal speed controller .............................................100 

Speed I Time .......................................................101 

Speed P Gain .......................................................100 

Interrupt .................................................................82, 83 

IT Mains supply .............................................................1 

IxR Compensation ........................................................98 

J 

Jog Frequency ...............................................................97 

K 

Keyboard reference .....................................................100 

Keys ..............................................................................48 

- Key ......................................................................50 

+ Key .....................................................................50 

Control keys ..........................................................48 

ENTER key ...........................................................50 

ESCAPE key ..........................................................50 

Function keys ........................................................50 

NEXT key .............................................................50 

PREVIOUS key ....................................................50 

RUN L ..................................................................48 

RUN R ..................................................................48 

STOP/RESET .......................................................48 

Toggle Key ............................................................48 

L 

LCD display .................................................................47 

Level control ...........................................................39, 63 

Load default ................................................................. 73 

Load monitor ....................................................... 40, 114 

Local/Remote ............................................................... 62 

Lock code ..................................................................... 63 

Long motor cables ........................................................ 19 

Low Voltage Directive .................................................... 9 

Lower Band ................................................................ 107 

Lower Band Limit ...................................................... 109 

M 

Machine Directive .......................................................... 9 

Main menu .................................................................. 50 

Mains supply .................................................... 17, 24, 27 

Maintenance ............................................................... 161 

Manis cables ................................................................. 17 

Manufacturer’s certificate ............................................... 9 

Max Frequency ................................................. 89, 95, 96 

Memory ....................................................................... 40 

Menu 

(110) ..................................................................... 59 

(120) ..................................................................... 60 

(210) ..................................................................... 60 

(211) ..................................................................... 60 

(212) ..................................................................... 60 

(213) ..................................................................... 60 

(214) ..................................................................... 61 

(215) ..................................................................... 61 

(216) ..................................................................... 61 

(217) ..................................................................... 62 

(218) ..................................................................... 63 

(219) ..................................................................... 63 

(21A) .................................................................... 63 

(220) ..................................................................... 64 

(221) ..................................................................... 64 

(222) ..................................................................... 65 

(223) ..................................................................... 65 

(224) ..................................................................... 65 

(225) ..................................................................... 65 

(226) ..................................................................... 65 

(227) ..................................................................... 66 

(228) ..................................................................... 66 

(229) ..................................................................... 66 

(22A) .................................................................... 67 

(22B) ..................................................................... 68 

(22C) .................................................................... 68 

(22D) .................................................................... 68 

(230) ..................................................................... 69 

(231) ..................................................................... 69 

(232) ..................................................................... 69 

(233) ..................................................................... 70 

(234) ..................................................................... 70 

(235) ..................................................................... 71 

(236) ..................................................................... 71 

(237) ..................................................................... 71 

(240) ..................................................................... 72 

(241) ..................................................................... 72 

(242) ..................................................................... 73 

(243) ..................................................................... 73 

(244) ..................................................................... 74 

(245) ..................................................................... 74 


(250) .....................................................................74 

(251) .....................................................................75 

(252) .....................................................................75 

(253) .....................................................................75 

(254) .....................................................................75 

(255) .....................................................................76 

(256) .....................................................................76 

(257) .....................................................................76 

(258) .....................................................................76 

(259) .....................................................................76 

(25A) .....................................................................77 

(25B) .....................................................................77 

(25C) .....................................................................77 

(25D) ....................................................................77 

(25E) .....................................................................77 

(25F) .....................................................................78 

(25G) ....................................................................78 

(25H) ....................................................................78 

(25I) ......................................................................78 

(25J) ......................................................................78 

(25K) .....................................................................79 

(25L) .....................................................................79 

(25M) ....................................................................79 

(25N) ..............................................................74, 79 

(25O) ....................................................................79 

(25P) .....................................................................79 

(25Q) ....................................................................80 

(25R) .....................................................................80 

(25S) .....................................................................80 

(25T) .....................................................................80 

(25U) ....................................................................80 

(260) .....................................................................81 

(261) .....................................................................81 

(262) .....................................................................81 

(2621) ...................................................................81 

(2622) ...................................................................82 

(263) .....................................................................82 

(2631) ...................................................................82 

(2632) ...................................................................82 

(2633) ...................................................................82 

(2634) ...................................................................82 

(264) .....................................................................82 

(265) .....................................................................83 

(269) .....................................................................83 

(310) .....................................................................84 

(320) .....................................................................84 

(321) .....................................................................84 

(322) .....................................................................85 

(323) .....................................................................85 

(324) .....................................................................86 

(325) .....................................................................87 

(326) .....................................................................87 

(327) .....................................................................88 

(328) .....................................................................88 

(331) .....................................................................89 

(332) .....................................................................89 

(333) .....................................................................89 

(334) .....................................................................90 

(335) .....................................................................90 

(336) .....................................................................90 

(337) ..................................................................... 91 

(338) ..................................................................... 91 

(339) ..................................................................... 91 

(33A) .................................................................... 92 

(33B) ..................................................................... 92 

(33C) .................................................................... 92 

(33D) .................................................................... 93 

(33E) ..................................................................... 93 

(33F) ..................................................................... 93 

(33G) .................................................................... 94 

(341) ..................................................................... 95 

(342) ..................................................................... 95 

(343) ..................................................................... 96 

(344) ..................................................................... 96 

(345) ..................................................................... 96 

(346) ..................................................................... 96 

(347) ..................................................................... 97 

(348) ..................................................................... 97 

(351) ..................................................................... 97 

(354) ..................................................................... 98 

(361) ..................................................................... 99 

(362) ..................................................................... 99 

(363) ..................................................................... 99 

(364) ..................................................................... 99 

(365) ..................................................................... 99 

(366) ..................................................................... 99 

(367) ................................................................... 100 

(368) ..................................................................... 99 

(369) ................................................................... 100 

(371) ................................................................... 100 

(372) ................................................................... 100 

(373) ................................................................... 101 

(380) ................................................................... 101 

(381) ................................................................... 101 

(383) ................................................................... 102 

(384) ................................................................... 102 

(385) ................................................................... 102 

(386) ................................................................... 103 

(387) ................................................................... 103 

(388) ................................................................... 104 

(389) ................................................................... 104 

(391) ................................................................... 105 

(392) ................................................................... 105 

(393) ................................................................... 105 

(394) ................................................................... 106 

(395) ................................................................... 107 

(396) ................................................................... 107 

(398) ................................................................... 107 

(399) ................................................................... 108 

(39A) .................................................................. 108 

(39B) ................................................................... 108 

(39C) .................................................................. 109 

(39D) .................................................................. 109 

(39E) ................................................................... 109 

(39F) ................................................................... 110 

(39G) .................................................................. 110 

(39H-39M) ......................................................... 111 

(410) ................................................................... 114 

(411) ................................................................... 114 

(412) ................................................................... 114 


(413) ...................................................................114 

(414) ...................................................................114 

(415) ...................................................................115 

(416) ...................................................................115 

(4162) .................................................................115 

(417) ...................................................................115 

(4171) .................................................................115 

(4172) .................................................................116 

(418) ...................................................................116 

(4181) .................................................................116 

(4182) .................................................................116 

(419) ...................................................................116 

(4191) .................................................................116 

(4192) .................................................................117 

(41A) ...................................................................117 

(41B) ...................................................................117 

(41C) ...................................................................117 

(421) ...................................................................118 

(422) ...................................................................119 

(423) ...................................................................119 

(424) ...................................................................119 

(511) ...................................................................119 

(512) ...................................................................121 

(513) ...................................................................122 

(514) ...................................................................124 

(515) ...................................................................125 

(516) ...................................................................125 

(517) ...................................................................125 

(518) ...................................................................125 

(519) ...................................................................125 

(51A) ...................................................................125 

(51B) ...................................................................126 

(51C) ...................................................................126 

(521) .............................................................94, 126 

(522) ...................................................................127 

(529-52H) ...........................................................127 

(531) ...................................................................128 

(532) ...................................................................129 

(533) ...................................................................130 

(534) ...................................................................131 

(535) ...................................................................132 

(536) ...................................................................132 

(541) ...................................................................132 

(542) ...................................................................134 

(551) ...................................................................134 

(552) ...................................................................134 

(553) ...................................................................134 

(55D) ..................................................................135 

(561) ...................................................................135 

(562) ...................................................................136 

(563-56G) ...........................................................136 

(610) ...................................................................136 

(611) ...................................................................136 

(612) ...................................................................138 

(613) ...................................................................139 

(614) ...................................................................139 

(615) ...................................................................139 

(616) ...................................................................139 

(617) ...................................................................140 

(618) ...................................................................140 

(620) ................................................................... 140 

(621) ........................................................... 140, 141 

(622) ................................................................... 141 

(623) ................................................................... 141 

(624) ................................................................... 141 

(625) ................................................................... 141 

(630) ................................................................... 142 

(631) ................................................................... 142 

(632) ................................................................... 142 

(633) ................................................................... 142 

(634) ................................................................... 143 

(635) ................................................................... 143 

(640) ................................................................... 143 

(641) ................................................................... 143 

(642) ................................................................... 144 

(643) ................................................................... 144 

(644) ................................................................... 144 

(645) ................................................................... 144 

(649) ................................................................... 145 

(650) ................................................................... 145 

(651) ................................................................... 145 

(652) ................................................................... 145 

(653) ................................................................... 145 

(654) ................................................................... 145 

(655) ................................................................... 146 

(659) ................................................................... 146 

(711) ................................................................... 146 

(712) ................................................................... 146 

(713) ................................................................... 147 

(714) ................................................................... 147 

(715) ................................................................... 147 

(716) ................................................................... 147 

(717) ................................................................... 147 

(718) ................................................................... 147 

(719) ................................................................... 148 

(71A) .................................................................. 148 

(71B) ................................................................... 148 

(720) ................................................................... 148 

(721) ................................................................... 148 

(722) ................................................................... 148 

(723) ................................................................... 149 

(724) ................................................................... 149 

(725) ................................................................... 150 

(726) ................................................................... 150 

(727) ................................................................... 150 

(728-72A) ........................................................... 151 

(730) ................................................................... 151 

(731) ................................................................... 151 

(7311) ................................................................. 151 

(732) ................................................................... 151 

(733) ................................................................... 152 

(7331) ................................................................. 152 

(800) ................................................................... 152 

(810) ................................................................... 152 

(811) ................................................................... 152 

(811-81N) ................................................... 152, 153 

(820) ................................................................... 153 

(8A0) .................................................................. 153 

(900) ................................................................... 154 

(920) ................................................................... 154 


(922) ...................................................................154 

Minimum Frequency ....................................................90 

Monitor function 

Alarm Select ........................................................117 

Delay time ...........................................................114 

Max Alarm ..........................................................114 

Overload .......................................................40, 114 

Response delay ............................................115, 117 

Start delay ............................................................114 

Motor cables .................................................................17 

Motor cos phi (power factor) ........................................66 

Motor data ...................................................................64 

Motor Frequency ..........................................................65 

Motor frequency ...........................................................65 

Motor I2t Current ......................................................159 

Motor identification run ...............................................66 

Motor Potentiometer ............................................99, 127 

Motor potentiometer ..................................................127 

Motor ventilation .........................................................66 

Motors ............................................................................7 

Motors in parallel .........................................................21 

MotPot .........................................................................90 

N 

Nominal motor frequency ............................................96 

Number of drives ........................................................105 

O 

Operation .....................................................................60 

Options ........................................................................32 

Brake chopper .....................................................163 

External Control Panel (ECP) .............................163 

I/O Board ............................................................164 

Output coils ........................................................164 

Protection class IP23 and IP54 ............................163 

Serial communication, fieldbus ............................164 

OR operator ...............................................................140 

Output coils ...............................................................164 

Overload ...............................................................40, 114 

Overload alarm .............................................................40 

P 

Parameter sets 

Load default values ................................................73 

Load parameter sets from Control Panel ................74 

Parameter Set Selection .........................................35 

Select a Parameter set .............................................72 

PI Autotune ................................................................100 

PID Controller ...........................................................101 

Closed loop PID control ......................................102 

Feedback signal ....................................................101 

PID D Time ........................................................102 

PID I Time .........................................................102 

PID P Gain .........................................................102 

Power LED ...................................................................48 

Priority .........................................................................37 

Process Value ..............................................................146 

Product standard, EMC ..................................................8 

Programming ................................................................51 

Protection class IP23 and IP54 ...................................163 

PT100 Inputs ............................................................... 71 

PTC input .................................................................... 71 

Pump/Fan Control ..................................................... 105 

Q 

Quick Setup Card .......................................................... 7 

R 

Reference 

Frequency ........................................................... 118 

Motor potentiometer .......................................... 127 

Reference signal ............................................... 60, 84 

Set reference value ................................................. 84 

Torque ................................................................ 119 

View reference value .............................................. 84 

Reference control ......................................................... 61 

Reference signal ............................................................ 61 

Relay output ............................................................... 134 

Relay 1 ................................................................ 134 

Relay 2 ................................................................ 134 

Relay 3 ................................................................ 134 

Release speed ................................................................ 93 

Remote control ............................................................. 38 

Reset command .......................................................... 126 

Reset control ................................................................ 61 

Resolution .................................................................... 59 

RFI mains filter ............................................................ 17 

Rotation ....................................................................... 63 

RS232/485 ................................................................... 81 

RUN ............................................................................ 48 

Run command ............................................................. 48 

Run Left command .................................................... 126 

Run Right command .................................................. 126 

Running motor ............................................................ 92 

S 

Select Drive ................................................................ 105 

Settle Time ................................................................. 109 

Setup menu .................................................................. 50 

Menu structure ..................................................... 50 

Signal ground ............................................................. 179 

Single-ended connection .............................................. 31 

Software ..................................................................... 154 

Sound characteristic ..................................................... 67 

Speed .......................................................................... 146 

Speed Mode ................................................................. 60 

Spinstart ....................................................................... 92 

Standards ....................................................................... 8 

Start Delay ................................................................. 108 

Start/Stop settings ........................................................ 89 

Status indications ......................................................... 47 

Stop categories .............................................................. 45 

Stop command ........................................................... 126 

Stop Delay ................................................................. 108 

Stripping lengths .......................................................... 20 

Switches ....................................................................... 28 

Switching frequency ..................................................... 67 

Switching in motor cables ............................................ 19 


T 

Terminal connections ...................................................28 

Test Run .......................................................................66 

Timer .........................................................................106 

Torque ....................................................................59, 97 

Transition Frequency ..................................................109 

Trip ..............................................................................48 

Trip causes and remidial action ...................................158 

Trips, warnings and limits ..........................................157 

Twisted cables ...............................................................32 

Type ...........................................................................154 

Type code number ..........................................................8 

U 

Underload ....................................................................40 

Underload alarm .........................................................114 

Unlock Code ................................................................63 

Upper Band ................................................................107 

Menu 

(397) 107 

Upper Band Limit ......................................................108 

V 

V/Hz Mode ..................................................................60 

Vector Brake .................................................................94 

Ventilation ....................................................................66 

View reference value .....................................................84 

Voltage .........................................................................28 

W 

Warning .....................................................................152

Omron SX inverter manual

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?